hit counter script
Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075 Series Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Canon Manuals
  4. All in One Printer
  5. imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075 Series
  6. Service manual

Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075 Series Service Manual

Hide thumbs
1
2
3
4
Table Of Contents
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
June 3, 2011
Revision 5
imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075 / 6065 / 6055
Series

Service Manual

Product Overview
Technology
Periodic Service
Parts Replacement and Clearning
Adjustment
Troubleshooting
Error Code
Service Mode
Installation
Appendix
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075 Series

Summary of Contents for Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075 Series

  • Page 1: Service Manual

    June 3, 2011 Revision 5 imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075 / 6065 / 6055 Series Service Manual Product Overview Technology Periodic Service Parts Replacement and Clearning Adjustment Troubleshooting Error Code Service Mode Installation Appendix...
  • Page 2 This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new not be copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the edition of this manual.
  • Page 3 Explanation of Symbols The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual: The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of Symbols Explanation Symbols...
  • Page 4 Blank Page...

  • Page 5: Table Of Contents

    Contents Safety Precautions Power Supply Specifications: --------------------------------------------------1-12 Weight and Size -------------------------------------------------------------------1-12 CDRH Act -----------------------------------------------------------------------0-2 Productivity (Print Speed) -------------------------------------------------------1-13 Laser Safety --------------------------------------------------------------------0-2 Paper Type -------------------------------------------------------------------------1-14 Handling of Laser System --------------------------------------------------0-2 External View/Internal View ---------------------------------------------- 1-25 Turn power switch ON -------------------------------------------------------0-3 External View ----------------------------------------------------------------------1-25 Safety of Toner -----------------------------------------------------------------0-3 External Cover ------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-25 About Toner ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0-3...
  • Page 6 Boot/Shutdown sequence --------------------------------------------------------------- 2-11 Exposure -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-53 Controls -----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-13 Primary Charging --------------------------------------------------------------------------2-54 Developing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-56 Flow of Image Data -----------------------------------------------------------------------2-13 Transfer --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-58 Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection) -----2-14 Separation -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-62 High capacity HDD (Option) ------------------------------------------------------------2-23 Drum Cleaning -----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-64 HDD mirroring feature (option) ---------------------------------------------------------2-24 Drum-related Issues ----------------------------------------------------------------------2-65 Removable HDD (option) ----------------------------------------------------------------2-29 Toner Supply Area -------------------------------------------------------------------------2-68...
  • Page 7 Periodical Servicing List---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-114 Jam Code List ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-147 When Replacing Parts------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-115 Forced Paper Feed Control ----------------------------------------------------------- 2-149 Troubleshooting -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-116 Servicing -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-150 Pickup / Feed System -----------------------------------------------------2-117 Periodically Replaced Parts ----------------------------------------------------------- 2-150 Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-117 Consumable Parts ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-150 Periodical Servicing List---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-150 Overview ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-117 When Replacing Parts------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-150...
  • Page 8 Network configuration process ------------------------------------------------------- 2-169 Outline -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-190 Login to SMS --------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-170 License for forwarding --------------------------------------------------------- 2-190 Outline -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-170 Outline -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-190 Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted SSL Communication --- Procedure to create license for forwarding ---------------------------------------- 2-190 Uninstalling an Application ---------------------------------------------------- 2-193 2-171 Login by Password Authentication -------------------------------------------------- 2-171...
  • Page 9 Using USB Devices ------------------------------------------------------------ 2-210 Limitations and Cautions ------------------------------------------------------ 2-243 USB Driver -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-210 Limitations --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-243 Initialization of MEAP driver priority registration --------------------------------- 2-212 Cautions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-243 USB Device report print ---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-212 Overview of Preparation ------------------------------------------------------ 2-245 Reference material ------------------------------------------------------------- 2-215 Setting Sales Company’s HQ ------------------------------------------------ 2-245 Glossary ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-215 Network Settings ---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-246...
  • Page 10 Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts ----------------4-10 Removing the Photosensitive Drum ---------------------------------------- 4-122 Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts --------------------------------------------4-10 Cleaning Photosensitive Drum ---------------------------------------------- 4-126 List of Cleaning Parts ---------------------------------------------------------------------4-20 Cleaning the Drum edges ----------------------------------------------------- 4-127 List of Fan ---------------------------------------------------------------------------4-34 Removing the Cleaner Separation Claw ---------------------------------- 4-127 List of Clutch / Solenoid ---------------------------------------------------------4-36 Removing the Side Seal ------------------------------------------------------ 4-128 List of Motor ------------------------------------------------------------------------4-40...
  • Page 11 Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit ------- 4-182 External Auxiliary System ----------------------------------------------- 4-230 Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper -- 4-186 Removing the Filter (for primary charging) ------------------------------- 4-230 Removing the Pressure Roller ----------------------------------------------- 4-188 Removing the Ozone Filter --------------------------------------------------- 4-230 Removing the Pressure Roller Static Eliminator Unit ------------------ 4-189 Removing the DC Controller PCB ------------------------------------------ 4-231...
  • Page 12 Troubleshooting Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool -----------------------------------------------------6-29 Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool ----------------------------------------------6-30 Test Print ------------------------------------------------------------------------6-2 Layout Drawing -----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-30 Overview ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-2 Basic Flowchart -------------------------------------------------------------------6-31 How to View the Test Print ------------------------------------------------------- 6-3 Basic Check Items ------------------------------------------------------------------------6-32 Grid (TYPE=1) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-3 Operation ---------------------------------------------------------------------------6-32 17 gradations (TYPE=2/3) ---------------------------------------------------------------- 6-3 Boot System Error Diagnosis -----------------------------------------------------------6-32...
  • Page 13 Clearing Download File ------------------------------------------------------------------6-71 Storage Method of System Information ------------------------------------------- 6-105 Download Menu 2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------6-71 Description of Log to be Collected ------------------------------------------------- 6-105 Other Menu ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-71 Collecting System Information ----------------------------------------------- 6-106 Troubleshooting -------------------------------------------------------------------6-72 Collection Destination ------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-106 Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device) ---------------------------- 6-106 Error Code: E753-0001 ------------------------------------------------------------------6-72 Making Initial Checks ------------------------------------------------------ 6-73 Manual Saving by Holding Down the Counter + 1.2.3 ------------------------- 6-106...
  • Page 14 Inserter-L1 --------------------------------------------------------------------------7-87 ADF (FEEDER>P001 to P007) --------------------------------------------------------8-52 Paper Deck Uint - A1 (SORTER>P048 to P050) ----------------------------------8-53 PaperFolding Inserter Unit-H1 -------------------------------------------------7-88 Paper Deck Uint - D1 (SORTER>P048 to P050) ----------------------------------8-54 External 2-hole Puncher-A1 ----------------------------------------------------7-89 Inserter - L1 (SORTER>P047 to P061) ----------------------------------------------8-55 Staple Finisher-E1/Booklet Finisher-E1 -------------------------------------7-90 Paper Folding Inserter Unit - H1 (SORTER>P047 to P061) --------------------8-56 Alarm Code ------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-91...
  • Page 15 2D-SHADE -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-115 FUNCTION ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-204 OPTION --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-117 OPTION --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-206 FNC-SW ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-117 SORTER -------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-207 DSPLY-SW -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-125 ADJUST --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-207 IMG-FIX ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-128 FUNCTION ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-212 IMG-DEV ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-131 OPTION --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-213 IMG-LSR ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-134 BOARD ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-215 IMG-RDR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-134 OPTION --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-215 IMG-MCON -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-136...
  • Page 16 Image Position Adjustment -----------------------------------------------------9-26 Cassette Heater Unit-38 -----------------------------------------------------------------9-54 Checking the Parts to be Installed (Europe only) -------------------------9-54 Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side) ----------------------------------------------9-26 Left Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side) ---------------------------------------------9-28 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power ------------------------9-54 Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side) ----------------------------------------9-29 Installation Procedure ------------------------------------------------------------9-54 Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side) ---------------------------------------9-29...
  • Page 17 Installation Procedure ------------------------------------------------------------9-98 Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export-------------------------- 9-132 Removing the Main Controller PCB 1 ------------------------------------------------9-98 Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only) ------------------------- 9-133 Installing the Expansion Bus-F1/F2 and the IPSec Board-B2 Simultaneously -- Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-137 9-99 Installation Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------- 9-137 Installing the Expansion Bus-F1/F2, the Wireless LAN Board-B1 and the...
  • Page 18 Checking the Contents -------------------------------------------------------- 9-170 [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-209 Option HDD (250GB) ------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-171 HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit ------------------- 9-172 Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit --- Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption &...
  • Page 19 Assembling the Option HDD (the Second HDD) -------------------------------- 9-245 [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Changing Configuration inside of HDD Case Unit ------------------------------ 9-248 Kit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-285 Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board and HDD Case Unit -- 9-249 Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption &...
  • Page 20 Installing the Encryption Board and HDD Case Unit --------------------------- 9-324 General Circuit Diagram (17/24) ---------------------------------------------------- XXVIII Installing the System Software Using the SST -------------------------- 9-331 General Circuit Diagram (18/24) ------------------------------------------------------ XXIX General Circuit Diagram (19/24) -------------------------------------------------------XXX Checking the Security Version ----------------------------------------------- 9-331 General Circuit Diagram (20/24) ------------------------------------------------------ XXXI Checking the Security Mark -------------------------------------------------- 9-331 General Circuit Diagram (21/24) ----------------------------------------------------- XXXII...
  • Page 21 Soft Counter List ------------------------------------------------------------LXIX Soft counter specifications ----------------------------------------------------- LXIX Soft Counter List ----------------------------------------------------------------- LXIX 000 to 099 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LXIX 100 to 199 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LXX 200 to 299 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LXXI 300 to 399 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LXXII 400 to 499 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------LXXIII 500 to 599 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LXXIV 600 to 699 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LXXIV 700 to 799 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LXXIV 800 to 899 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LXXV...

  • Page 22: Safety Precautions

    Safety Precautions ■ CDRH Act ■ Laser Safety ■ Handling of Laser System ■ Turn power switch ON ■ Safety of Toner ■ Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery ■ Notes Before it Works imageRUNNER ADVANCE Serving 6075/6065/6055 Series ■ Points to Note at Cleaning...
  • Page 23 CDRH Act Handling of Laser System The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the US Food and Drum Administration put When servicing the area around the laser assembly, be sure to turn off the main power. into force regulations concerning laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply The machine's covers that can reflect laser light are identified by means of a warning label to laser products manufactured on and after August 1, 1976, and the sale of laser products (Figure).

  • Page 24: Safety Of Toner

    Turn power switch ON Safety of Toner The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control panel power About Toner switch. The machine goes on when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than in low power The machine's toner is a non-toxic material made of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.

  • Page 25: Points To Note At Cleaning

    Points to Note at Cleaning When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol, be sure to check that the component of solvent is vaporized completely before assembling.

  • Page 26: Product Overview

    Product Overview ■ Product Lineup ■ Features ■ Specifications ■ External View/Internal View ■ Operation Product Overview...

  • Page 27: Main Body

    Product Overview > Product Lineup > Pickup/Delivery System Option > Applicable Option for Each Model Product Lineup Pickup/Delivery System Option ■ Applicable Option for Each Model Main Body ● Combination imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075 / 6065 / 6055 F-1-1 The underlined numerical value indicates the print speed (ppm: print per minute). imageRUNNER imageRUNNER iimageRUNNER...

  • Page 28: Required Options/Conditions

    Product Overview > Product Lineup > Pickup/Delivery System Option > Required Options/Conditions Product name (Japan) Required options, conditions, etc. ■ Required Options/Conditions Paper Folding Insertion Folding Unit + Insertion Unit Unit-H1 Staple Finisher/Booklet Finisher is required at the downstream side. ●...

  • Page 29: Scanning System Options

    Product Overview > Product Lineup > Scanning System Options > Required Options and Conditions Scanning System Options Product name Required options, conditions, etc. Color Image Reader Reverse 2-sided scanning ■ Required Options and Conditions Unit-C1 B/W (1-sided/2-sided): 600 dpi=85/40 ipm, 300 dpi: 85/40 ipm Color (1-sided/2-sided): 600 dpi=51/20 ipm, 300 dpi:85/40 ipm Paper weight: Color Image Reader Unit-C1...

  • Page 30: Function Expansion System Options

    Product Overview > Product Lineup > Function Expansion System Options > Required Options and Conditions Function Expansion System Options ● Hardware Products Product name (Japan) Required options, conditions, etc. ■ Required Options and Conditions Utility Tray-A1/A2 Using with Handset-G2 is not available. No particular options and conditions are required.
  • Page 31 Product Overview > Product Lineup > Function Expansion System Options > Required Options and Conditions Product name (Japan) Required options, conditions, etc. Product name (Japan) Required options, conditions, etc. IPSec Security Board-B2 PCI Bus Expansion Kit-F1/F2 is required. User Signature & Time Stamp Expansion No particular options and conditions are required.

  • Page 32: Features

    Product Overview > Features > Service Features > Improved Service Operability Features Service Features ■ Improved Service Operability Product Features ● Removing of the Process Unit becomes easy. The Process Unit can be removed by accessing only from the front side. High productivity High image quality Energy saving...

  • Page 33: New Service Mode

    Product Overview > Features > Service Features > Improved Upgrading Operability ● Easy access to the parts at rear side. ■ New Service Mode Since the Rear Cover Unit becomes a retractable unit, access to the parts at rear side The description of each service mode item is displayed as well.

  • Page 34: Jam/Error Code Display Specifications

    Product Overview > Features > Service Features > Jam/Error Code Display Specifications ■ Jam/Error Code Display Specifications Service Advantage When a paper jam/error is reported from the user: Jam code: • The location (device) causing the paper jam/error can be recognized before the service “Jam Code”...

  • Page 35: Applying New Connectors

    Product Overview > Features > Service Features > Applying New Connectors 1-10 ■ Applying New Connectors Newly-configured connectors are used as some connectors on each controller PCB. F-1-12 ● Purpose To prevent the communication error caused by the following: • Loose/removed connector due to vibration during transportation •...

  • Page 36: Specifications

    Product Overview > Specifications > Product Specifications 1-11 Specifications Installation type of main body Console type Paper size Deck A4, B5, LTR Cassette A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K, LDR, LGL, Product Specifications LTR, LTRR, STMTR, EXE Multi-purpose Tray Cassette feedable size Postcard, Reply Postcard, 4 on 1 Postcard Installation type of main body...

  • Page 37: Power Supply Specifications

    Product Overview > Specifications > Weight and Size 1-12 Power Supply Specifications: Weight and Size Product name Power Japan North Europe Asia Australia Product name Width (mm) Depth (mm) Height (mm) Weight (kg) imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075 / 1220 supply America 6065/ 6055 source Paper Deck Unit-A1...

  • Page 38: Productivity (Print Speed)

    Product Overview > Specifications > Productivity (Print Speed) 1-13 Productivity (Print Speed) Unit: sheets / minute Paper type Size Feeding Width imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075 imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6065 imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6055 Deck / Cassette Multi-purpose Tray Deck / Cassette Multi-purpose Tray Deck / Cassette Multi-purpose Tray direction...

  • Page 39: Paper Type

    Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type 1-14 Paper Type Following shows the types of usable papers. See the table below for the custom paper size. Type Feeding direction (mm) Width direction (mm) Custom paper size 0-1 148.0 to 487.7 100 to 139.6 Custom paper size 0-2 148.0 to 181.9...
  • Page 40 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type 1-15 Pickup position Feeding Width Type Size direction direction Multi-purpose Paper Paper (mm) (mm) Right Deck Left Deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Insertion Unit Tray Deck-A1 Deck-D1 Thin paper (52 to 63 g/m 11x17 431.8 279.4...
  • Page 41 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type 1-16 Pickup position Feeding Width Type Size direction direction Multi-purpose Paper Paper (mm) (mm) Right Deck Left Deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Insertion Unit Tray Deck-A1 Deck-D1 Plain paper 1 (64 to 90 g/m Recycled paper 1 (64 to 90 g/m Color paper...
  • Page 42 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type 1-17 Pickup position Feeding Width Type Size direction direction Multi-purpose Paper Paper (mm) (mm) Right Deck Left Deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Insertion Unit Tray Deck-A1 Deck-D1 Heavy paper 1 (91 to 180 g/m Letterhead 11x17 431.8...
  • Page 43 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type 1-18 Pickup position Feeding Width Type Size direction direction Multi-purpose Paper Paper (mm) (mm) Right Deck Left Deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Insertion Unit Tray Deck-A1 Deck-D1 Heavy paper 2 (181 to 220 g/m 11x17 431.8 279.4...
  • Page 44 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type 1-19 Pickup position Feeding Width Type Size direction direction Multi-purpose Paper Paper (mm) (mm) Right Deck Left Deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Insertion Unit Tray Deck-A1 Deck-D1 Heavy paper 3 (221 to 256 g/m 11x17 431.8 279.4...
  • Page 45 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type 1-20 Pickup position Feeding Width Type Size direction direction Multi-purpose Paper Paper (mm) (mm) Right Deck Left Deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Insertion Unit Tray Deck-A1 Deck-D1 Transparency 11x17 431.8 279.4 355.6 215.9 215.9 279.4 LTRR...
  • Page 46 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type 1-21 Pickup position Feeding Width Type Size direction direction Multi-purpose Paper Paper (mm) (mm) Right Deck Left Deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Insertion Unit Tray Deck-A1 Deck-D1 Labels 11x17 431.8 279.4 355.6 215.9 215.9 279.4 LTRR...
  • Page 47 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type 1-22 Pickup position Feeding Width Type Size direction direction Multi-purpose Paper Paper (mm) (mm) Right Deck Left Deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Insertion Unit Tray Deck-A1 Deck-D1 Tracing 11x17 431.8 279.4 355.6 215.9 215.9 279.4 LTRR...
  • Page 48 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type 1-23 Pickup position Feeding Width Type Size direction direction Multi-purpose Paper Paper (mm) (mm) Right Deck Left Deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Insertion Unit Tray Deck-A1 Deck-D1 Cotton (Bond) 11x17 431.8 279.4 355.6 215.9 215.9 279.4...
  • Page 49 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type 1-24 Pickup position Feeding Width Type Size direction direction Multi-purpose Paper Paper (mm) (mm) Right Deck Left Deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Insertion Unit Tray Deck-A1 Deck-D1 Pre-Punched paper 215.9 279.4 Postcard Postcard Reply Postcard 4 on 1 Postcard T-1-12...

  • Page 50: External View/Internal View

    Product Overview > External View/Internal View > External View > External Cover 1-25 External View/Internal View [32] External View [34] [31] [17] [33] ■ External Cover [30] [18] [29] [16] [28] [19] [27] [26] [15] [25] [20] [24] [23] [14] [21] [22] [13]...

  • Page 51: Switches, I/F, Others

    Product Overview > External View/Internal View > Cross-Section View 1-26 Cross-Section View ■ Switches, I/F, Others Drum Cleaning Unit Pre-exposure Primary Charging Assembly ETB Unit Laser Scanner (Transfer Belt Unit) Unit Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit Fixing Assembly Developing Assembly Pre-transfer Reverse Delivery Unit Charging Assembly Main Power Switch...

  • Page 52: Operation

    Product Overview > Operation > Control Panel > Control Panel 1-27 Operation Control Panel ■ Control Panel Power Switch ■ Types of Power Switches Power Main Menu This machine has the Main Power Switch, the Control Panel Power Switch and the Energy Saver Environment Heater Switch.

  • Page 53: Main Menu

    Product Overview > Operation > Control Panel > Differences in Main Menu 1-28 ■ Main Menu ■ Differences in Main Menu iR 7105/iR 5075 Series iR ADVANCE 8105 / iR ADVANCE 6075 Series Copy Copy Send/Fax Scan and Send Mail Box Scan and Save (New) Access Stored Files (New) Fax/I-Fax Inbox...

  • Page 54: Settings/Registration Menu

    Product Overview > Operation > Control Panel > Differences in Settings/Registration Menu 1-29 ■ Settings/Registration Menu ■ Differences in Settings/Registration Menu iR 5075/5065/5055 Series iR ADVANCE 6075/6065/6055 Series Common Settings Preferences Settings/Registration Timer Setting Select an item to set Adjustment/Cleaning Adjustment/Maintenance System Settings Management Settings...

  • Page 55: Technology

    Technology ■ Basic Configuration ■ Main Controller ■ Laser Exposure System ■ Image Formation System ■ Fixing ■ Pickup / Feed System ■ External Auxiliary System ■ MEAP ■ Embedded RDS ■ Updater ■ System Management Operations Technology...

  • Page 56: Functional Configuration

    Technology > Basic Configuration > Functional Configuration Basic Configuration Functional Configuration The machine may broadly be divided into the following functional system blocks; document exposure system block, controller system block, laser exposure system block, image formation system block, fixing system block and pickup/feed system block. Document exposure system Reader Exposure lamp...

  • Page 57: Basic Sequence

    Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at power ON Basic Sequence ■ Basic sequence at power ON Main power ON Print Unit INITIAL INITIAL ROTATION STBY Polygon Motor(M44) ETB Motor(M43) Developing Motor(M2) Drum Motor(M1) Developing Clutch(CL1) Developing AC bias Developing DC bias Potential Sensor(EPC1)

  • Page 58: Basic Sequence At Printing

    Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 1-sided (2 sheets), Right deck, Reverse delivery> ■ Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 1-sided (2 sheets), Right deck, Reverse delivery> Start key ON Print Unit STBY INTR PRINT...

  • Page 59: Basic Sequence At Printing

    Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 2-sided (2 sheets), Right deck, Reverse delivery> ■ Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 2-sided (2 sheets), Right deck, Reverse delivery> Start key ON Print Unit STBY INTR PRINT...

  • Page 60: Main Controller

    Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Features Main Controller Main Controller PCBs 1 and 2 are connected through the Riser (connector for interface). Removability/installability of Main Controller PCB 1 has been improved by introducing this configuration (Slot-in/out) Overview ■ Features Using a new controller enables high speed PDL processing, high image quality and high functionality.

  • Page 61: Specifications/Configuration

    Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Specifications/configuration ■ Specifications/configuration ● Memory Main controller PCB 1 ● PCBs J2032 J2031 BAT1 Main Controller PCB 1 Main Controller PCB 2 DDR2-SDRAM 512MB+512MB HDD(Option) HDD(Standard) TPM PCB Flash PCB F-2-7 Parts name Function, specifications, features Main controller CPU: 1.2GHz, Control of the entire system...
  • Page 62 Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Specifications/configuration Main controller PCB 2 ● I/F, connector Main controller PCB 1 BAT1 J1003 DDR2-SDRAM J1003 512MB Standard Mini-USB J1007 J1015 DDR2-SDRAM 512MB Option J1017 USB(D) Riser J1018 J1019 USB(H) J1021 Flash J1020 F-2-9 Parts name Function, specifications, features...
  • Page 63 Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Specifications/configuration Function, specifications Function, specifications Jack Function, specifications Jack Function, specifications J1017 LAN I/F J1026 CC-VI:I/F for control interface kit (Op.) 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T Reader I/F J2017 Image analysis PCB I/F J1018 USB I/F (Device) J1027 Coin:I/F for card reader, I/F for serial Product name: Image Data Analyzer interface...
  • Page 64 Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Specifications/configuration 2-10 ● Function expansion options Main controller PCB 2 Main controller PCB1 Voice Operation/ Voice Data Analyzer Board Guidance DDR2-SDRAM Board Expansion Bus Wireless LAN PCB IPSec PCB F-2-13 IPSec PCB Name Function, specifications, features Image analysis PCB Product name: Image Data Analyzer Board-A1...

  • Page 65: Boot/Shutdown Sequence

    Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Boot/Shutdown sequence 2-11 ● HDD ■ Boot/Shutdown sequence The partitions for Advanced Box and the distribution server are added. ● Boot sequence User Box (same as the existing machine) area is 23GB and Advanced Box area is 9GB. Advanced Box area can be increased by installing the high-capacity HDD option.

  • Page 66: Shutdown Sequence

    Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Boot/Shutdown sequence 2-12 Related error codes (major error codes): Error code Error description E602 HDD error 0001 HDD failed to be recognizedStartup partition (BOOTDEV) is not found at startup 0002 No system software for the main CPU 0006 No system software for the sub CPU 4000...

  • Page 67: Controls

    Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Flow of Image Data 2-13 Controls ● Print ■ Flow of Image Data Network Following shows major image data flow. • The arrow mark indicates the flow of image data. ① • Numbers (1, 2, etc.) indicate processing order. Controller ●...

  • Page 68: Security Features (Encryption Key And Certificate, Password Protection)

    Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-14 ● SEND ■ Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection) Reader ● Overview ⑤ Scan type image ① The main controller PCB 1 of the host machine holds a new PCB named “TPM PCB”. “TPM” Format conversion processing stands for “Trusted Platform Module”, which collectively refers to the chip set for generating...
  • Page 69 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-15 ● Configuration of Security Information security information is not decodable correctly in case the HDD is failed or formatted because the public key information stored in the HDD is cleared. If this occurs, execute “Initialize All The security functionality behaves differently depending on the TPM setting on the UI.
  • Page 70 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-16 ● Preparation before Installing TPM ● Works before / after introduction Before installing TPM, ask the user to back up data. Execute the following in Setting / Registration mode (“TPM setting” is OFF by default). Follow the steps below to back up data.
  • Page 71 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-17 1. Enable Functionality 2.TPM Key Backup The TPM key backup file can be stored only in USB flash drive (supported file system: NOTE:Setup of “System Management PIN” FAT32).
  • Page 72 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-18 3) Click [Password] to enter the password (4-12 digits). Then, enter the password for CAUTION: The following may cause failures in backup. confirmation. If any of the following is detected, the backup process is aborted and the message and the cause for the failure are shown on the screen.
  • Page 73 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-19 3. Restore of TPM key CAUTION: The following may cause failures in restoration. Procedure is about the same as the backup work. If any of the following is detected, the restoration process is aborted and the message Difference between restore work and backup work: and the cause for the failure are shown on the screen.
  • Page 74 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-20 4. Disable the feature Key pair and server certificate registered in Management Setting (Setting/ Registration) > To set “OFF” for the TPM setting, execute [Initialize All Data / Settings]. [Device Management] >...
  • Page 75 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-21 ● Overview of Actions taken against Troubles ● Related Error Code Location Error TPM Setting = ON TPM Setting = OFF Relevant Error Code Error description, Assumed cause, remedy with failure Code...
  • Page 76 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-22 ● Security Information Storage Location Error Error description, Assumed cause, remedy Code Storage Backup Data Type Function Name of Data E746 Error in encryption Location Availability 0033...

  • Page 77: High Capacity Hdd (Option)

    Technology > Main Controller > Controls > High capacity HDD (Option) 2-23 ■ High capacity HDD (Option) Storage Backup Data Type Function Name of Data Location Availability The HDD capacity mounted on this machine is 80GB as standard. Mounting a 2.5 SRAM Password/ Network...

  • Page 78: Hdd Mirroring Feature (Option)

    Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option) 2-24 ■ HDD mirroring feature (option) Mirroring PCB controls reading/writing timing of HDD data. LED PCB makes the LED show operation status of the HDDs. This option enables mirroring of HDD data (RAID1). In the case of failure in one HDD, the operation is performed with the other HDD.
  • Page 79 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option) 2-25 ● To start using this feature (installation) “Rebuild” progress is shown in a massage at the status line on the control panel. “Copying hard disk data... xx%“ HDD1 is connected to Ch A on the Install HDD2 mirroring PCB NOTE:...
  • Page 80 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option) 2-26 ● HDD reading/writing operation ● Description of Modes The mirroring system of this machine consists of 4 modes. At reading: At writing: The modes in parentheses show the mirroring system statuses. Data is read by HDD1 (master HDD) The same data is written to each HDD at The status flows among the modes below during operation.
  • Page 81 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option) 2-27 Mode Flow at Start-up Mode Flow during Operation Turn ON Main Power Switch Mirror Mode Flow to Mode at Previous Job Completion Trouble Halt Mode Degrade Mode Rebuild Mode Mirror Mode Either HDD In which HDD?
  • Page 82 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option) 2-28 ● Overview of Trouble Recovery ● Points to Note in Servicing concerning Mirroring Functionality When any trouble occurs in the mirroring system, take the action for recovery appropriate to 1.

  • Page 83: Removable Hdd (Option)

    HDD encryption and mirroring functionality with the dedicated chipset on a board (Canon MFP Security Chip Version 2.00). Since the two functions are operated in a HDD, the encryption functionality can be independently enabled.
  • Page 84 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD Encryption/ Mirroring Kit (optional) 2-30 The following shows the statuses for each use case. 1. Initialize the encryption board via SST. Case 1: Normally operated This step makes the disk unformatted (E602-0001 is triggered if the unformatted disk is Case 2: HDD-related error occurs because the system on the HDD cannot be read (other started).
  • Page 85 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD Encryption/ Mirroring Kit (optional) 2-31 The figure below shows the final screen in initializing the encryption board. E610 and detailed codes The message as shown in the figure below is shown on the screen. Detailed E code Cause (Detected Error)

  • Page 86: Service Operations

    Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > HDD 2-32 Service Operations 2. After Replacing 1) HDD format ■ HDD 1-1) Start with the safe mode. (While pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously, turn ON the main powerswitch.) <Procedure of parts replacement> 1-2) Use SST to format all partitions.

  • Page 87: Main Controller Pcb

    Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 1 2-33 ■ Main Controller PCB 1 When using the Card Reader and imageWARE Accounting Manager <Procedure of parts replacement> Card ID used for imageWARE Accounting Manager is stored in the HDD, so NSA see "Removing Main Controller PCB 1,"...
  • Page 88 Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 2 2-34 ■ Main Controller PCB 2 NOTE: Resetting/registering the data is not necessary after Main Controller PCB 1 is replaced. <Procedure of parts replacement> see "Removing Main Controller PCB 2," on p. 4-86. <Procedure of adjustment>...
  • Page 89 Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 2 2-35 1. Before Replacing 2. When Replacing Perform the following operations. Be sure to get an approval from the user beforehand. 1) Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB 1) Backup of the set/registered data •...

  • Page 90: Tpm Pcb

    Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > TPM PCB 2-36 3. After Replacing ■ TPM PCB 1) After installing the parts, turn ON the main power switch. <Procedure of parts replacement> 2) Restoring the backup data see "Removing Main Controller PCB 1," on p. 4-81. Use the Remote UI.

  • Page 91: Laser Exposure System

    Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Overview 2-37 Laser Exposure System Laser is applied to the Nom-image image on the positively-charged drum with this machine. Image area Overview Non-image area Non-image area ■ Overview Laser ON Laser ON This machine uses an 8-beam method that enables exposure of 8 beams per scanning direction for high productivity.

  • Page 92: Specifications

    Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Parts Configuration 2-38 ■ Specifications ■ Parts Configuration Item Description Image Formation Lens Wave length 670nm (large) Laser type Red color laser Image Formation Lens Laser team (small) Laser output 7mW(Max) Number of laser beams 8 beams Reflection mirror Laser Driver PCB...

  • Page 93: Controls

    Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser ON Timing Control 2-39 Controls ■ Laser ON Timing Control ● Laser ON/OFF Control ■ Overview This control is performed to turn ON/OFF a laser beam according to the combination of laser control signals.
  • Page 94 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser ON Timing Control 2-40 ● Main Scanning Synchronization Control NOTE: This control is performed to adjust the writing position in the main scanning direction. EEPROM on the Laser Driver PCB stores the 8-beam phase displacement coefficient (laser phase coefficient), which is unique to the Laser Scanner Unit, and corrects 8-beam phase difference based on the stored coefficient.

  • Page 95: Laser Beam Intensity Control

    Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Beam Intensity Control 2-41 ● Sub Scanning Synchronization Control ■ Laser Beam Intensity Control This control is performed to adjust the writing position in the sub scanning direction. ● APC (Auto Power Control) Control To keep constant laser light intensity per 8 beams (1BD basis) <Execution timing>...

  • Page 96: Polygon Motor Control

    Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Shutter Control 2-42 ■ Polygon Motor Control ■ Laser Shutter Control This control is performed to rotate the polygon mirror at a specified speed. To prevent laser exposure in the machine when the Cover is open <Execution timing>...

  • Page 97: Servicing

    Technology > Laser Exposure System > Servicing > Major Adjustments 2-43 Servicing ■ Periodically Replaced Parts None ■ Consumable Parts None ■ Periodical Servicing List Cleaning Parts name Remarks interval Clean when black lines or the like occurs due to soil on Dust-proof glass the Dustproof Glass.

  • Page 98: Image Formation System

    Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Specifications 2-44 Image Formation System ■ Specifications ● Basic Specifications Overview Item Function/Method Photosensitive Drum Material A-Si ■ Overview Drum diameter 84 mm diameter Cleaning Cleaning Blade Toner image is formed by the magnetic, 1-component toner projection developing method in Process speed iR-ADV 6075: 350 mm/sec image formation system.

  • Page 99: Parts Configuration

    Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Parts Configuration 2-45 ● Charging Specifications ■ Parts Configuration ● Entire Configuration Primary Charging Developing High Pre-transfer Voltage PCB High Voltage PCB Charging PCB (PCB12) Toner Container (PCB11) (PCB26) Toner Supply Assembly Primary Charging Wire Developing...
  • Page 100 Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Parts Configuration 2-46 ● Process Area ● Transfer Area Primary Charging Idler Roller Pre-exposure LED Assembly Transfer Roller Drive Roller Grid Wire Static Eliminator Cleaning Blade Drum Cleaning Separation Guide Primary Blade Potential Sensor Charging Wire Developing Blade...
  • Page 101 Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Parts Configuration 2-47 ● Toner Supply Area ● Waste Toner Feeding Area Waste Toner Feed Screw Front View Waste Toner Feed Screw Toner Container Hopper Drum Cleaning Unit ETB cleaning Unit Sub Hopper Waste Toner Feed Assembly Toner Stirrer Buffer...

  • Page 102: Drive Configuration

    Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Drive Configuration 2-48 ■ Drive Configuration ● Transfer Area PS55 PS56 F-2-67 Code Parts name Function Duplex Feed Left Motor To make the ETB Unit (ETB) engaged/disengaged PS61 ETB Motor To drive the ETB Drive Roller, the Brush Roller and the Waste Toner Feed Screw.
  • Page 103 Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Drive Configuration 2-49 ● Toner Supply Area Code Parts name Function Buffer Toner Sensor 1 To detect toner level in the Buffer(To avoid oversupply to the Buffer) Buffer Toner Sensor 2 To detect toner level in the Buffer (to detect absence of toner in the Buffer) PS54 PS54 Toner Replacement Cover Sensor To detect whether the Toner Replacement Cover is...

  • Page 104: Print Process

    Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Print Process 2-50 ● Waste Toner Feeding Area ■ Print Process Block Step Overview Static formation 1 Exposure Light emission from the Pre-exposure LED removes residual block potential on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum to prevent density unevenness.
  • Page 105 Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Print Process 2-51 1.Electrostatic latent image formation Block 2.Primary Charging 1.Pre-exposure 3.Laser exposure 6.Drum cleaning Block 2.Development Photosensitive 4.Development 10.Drum Cleaning Block Drum 3.Transfer 5.Pre-transfer Charging 4.Fixing Block Block Delivery 8.Fixing 7.Separation 6.Transfer Registration MP Pickup Tray ETB Unit...

  • Page 106: Controls

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls 2-52 Controls Control name Description Exposure Pre-exposure control To apply the light of the Pre-exposure LED on the surface of the Primary Charging Exposure -Primary charging bias control Photosensitive Drum. -Pre-exposure control -Primary charging wire cleaning control Primary charging -Primary charging shutter control Separation...

  • Page 107: Exposure

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Exposure 2-53 ■ Exposure Control name Description Toner supply ● Pre-exposure Control Toner level detection To detect toner level in the Developing Unit and the Buffer Unit. Toner supply control To supply toner from the Toner Container to the Developing To prevent uneven density with the print image, residual potential on the Photosensitive Drum Assembly.

  • Page 108: Primary Charging

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Primary Charging 2-54 ■ Primary Charging ● Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Control To prevent charging failure caused by soil of the Primary Charging Wire. ● Primary Charging Bias Control <Execution timing> To make the surface of the Photosensitive Drum evenly and positively charged. •...
  • Page 109 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Primary Charging 2-55 ● Primary Charging Shutter Control Shutter Open/Close Operation Sequence To prevent uneven potential on the Photosensitive Drum caused by discharge products Elapsing time Operation (nitrogen oxide) accumulated on the Primary Charging Assembly. Image formation is 1.

  • Page 110: Developing

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Developing 2-56 <Control description> ■ Developing The shutter is open or closed by the cleaning mechanism of the Primary Charging Wire. ● Developing Bias Control The Primary Charging Shutter is made of fiber and usually taken up by the bobbin. To form a toner image on the Photosensitive Drum by charging toner on the Developing The drive of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M6) moves the Cleaning Pad to the Cylinder.
  • Page 111 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Developing 2-57 ● Dust-collection Bias Control ● Developing Supply Shutter Opening/Closing Mechanism To collect toner which floats over the Photosensitive Drum during developing process. There are shutters at the Supply Mouths of the Developing Assembly and the Buffer Unit to prevent toner scattering.

  • Page 112: Transfer

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer 2-58 <Opening and Closing Operations of the Buffer Shutter> ■ Transfer By pushing the Developing Assembly in the main body, edge of the Supply Mouth on the ● Pre-transfer Charging Bias Control assembly hits to leading edge of the Buffer Shutter.
  • Page 113 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer 2-59 ● Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Control ● Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Control To prevent charging failure caused by soil of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire. To prevent uneven potential on the Photosensitive Drum caused by discharge products (nitrogen oxide) accumulated on the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly.
  • Page 114 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer 2-60 ● Transfer Bias Control ● ETB Cleaning Control To transfer toner on the Photosensitive Drum to a paper. To prevent image failure caused by toner soil on the ETB, the residual toner on the Transfer The transfer bias (DC positive), which has been generated on the Transfer High Voltage PCB Belt is removed.
  • Page 115 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer 2-61 ● ETB Engagement/Disengagement Control To prevent image failure caused by toner soil on the ETB, the ETB is engaged or disengaged Transfer Belt with the Photosensitive Drum. Disengagement Engagement <Execution timing> •...

  • Page 116: Separation

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Separation 2-62 ■ Separation ● Separation Control <Separation from the Drum> Separation is performed using the curvature separation method. Photosensitive Drum Paper Separation Claw F-2-87 NOTE: The Separation Claw separates sheets before entering the Drum Cleaning Unit. This effectively avoids failure in paper feed (double feed, etc.) Paper Separation Claw...
  • Page 117 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Separation 2-63 ● Separation Claw Reciprocation Control <Separation from the ETB> By moving the Separation Claw back and forth (reciprocation), scar on the drum caused by Separation is performed using the curvature separation method and the Static Eliminator. the Separation Claw can be prevented.

  • Page 118: Drum Cleaning

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum Cleaning 2-64 ■ Drum Cleaning ● Separation Bias Control To prevent image soil caused by toner accumulated on the Drum Separation Claw, this ● Drum Cleaning Control control prevents attachment of toner on the Photosensitive Drum with the Drum Separation The blade, which is in contact with the Drum, removes residual toner and paper dust on the Claw.

  • Page 119: Drum-Related Issues

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum-related Issues 2-65 ■ Drum-related Issues ● Drum Heater Control To make potential characteristic for charging or exposure stable by keeping the specified ● Drum HP Detection temperature of the Photosensitive Drum. To detect home position of the Photosensitive Drum.
  • Page 120 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum-related Issues 2-66 <Operating condition> Operating condition of the heater differs according to the status of the Environment Switch and the host machine. A.2-dimensional shading OFF(defolt*1) <Environment Switch: OFF> Main Power sleep mode (low energy sleep mode (high energy Mode WarmUp(Recovery)
  • Page 121 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum-related Issues 2-67 B.2-dimensional shading ON *1] <Environment Switch: OFF> Main Power sleep mode (low energy sleep mode (high energy Mode WarmUp(Recovery) Standby/Energy Saver Copy/Print consumption)*3 consumption)*3 Main SW Switch Cassette SW Drum Heater Cassette...

  • Page 122: Toner Supply Area

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner Supply Area 2-68 <Environment Control> ■ Toner Supply Area Environment control 1: The condition of the heater at the time of turning OFF the main ● Toner Container Detection power continues. Toner Container detection is not performed with this machine.
  • Page 123 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner Supply Area 2-69 Toner Level Detection: NOTE: The Toner Excess Supply Sensor (TS2) detects amount of toner around the Buffer Toner Container Inlet. If toner is supplied excessively from the Sub Hopper to the Buffer Unit (if there are toner clusters), toner in the Buffer may overflow.

  • Page 124: Waste Toner Feeding Area

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Waste Toner Feeding Area 2-70 ■ Waste Toner Feeding Area Toner level Status Message Operation 5% or less Replace the toner After "Replace the toner cartridge." ● Waste Toner Full Level Detection cartridge.
  • Page 125 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Waste Toner Feeding Area 2-71 This machine performs black band control in order to maintain the drum cleaning ● Waste Toner Feed Screw Lock Detection performance. To detect lock state of the Waste Toner Feed Screw. Therefore the criterion of the full Waste Toner Container varies according to the environment The drive by the Developing Motor (M2) is transmitted to the Screw Gear, which makes and the image duty as shown in the following table.

  • Page 126: Image Stabilization Control

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control 2-72 ■ Image Stabilization Control ● Overview This control prevents image failure due to change of the environment or deterioration of the Photosensitive Drum to ensure stabilized print. Laser Power(Lp) Primary Laser Power(Lp) Primary current (Ip)
  • Page 127 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control 2-73 ● Execution Timing Execution items for image stabilization control differ according to the environment and condition of image formation parts. Following shows the control items at each sequence. Illustration.*70 deg C or lower in the fixing temperature,** 30 sec.70 deg C or lower in the fixing temperature,***Fixing temperature remaining high at power OFF/ON Timing Initial...
  • Page 128 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control 2-74 Timing Initial Paper Last Standard Warm-up rotation Interruption Arbitrary rotation interval rotation duration Forcible Control Remarks Normal power PASCAL PASCAL (second) Door interruption Low duty startup OFF/ Normal (Full (Quick Approx.

  • Page 129: Potential Control

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control 2-75 ● Potential Control <Control description> 1. VD control Perform the following controls according to the deterioration level of the Photosensitive Drum 1) The primary current (Ip_Target_Pre), which has been determined in the last potential and the environmental change.
  • Page 130 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control 2-76 2. VL control [When the drum surface potential is not as follows: -10V <= target potential <= +10V ] 1) The laser power (LP_Target_Pre), which has been determined in the last bright area •...
  • Page 131 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control 2-77 3. Determination of developing bias (Vdc) Start of VI potential Developing bias is determined by adding the Vback value (based on the environment table) control to VL (bright area potential) determined in the foregoing control. Irradiate laser power defined in the previous Developing bias (Vdc) = VL+Vback potential control and measure...
  • Page 132 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control 2-78 ● PASCAL Control NOTE: This control stabilizes gradation density characteristics on the image. Since Inbox images are binary, gradation adjustment cannot be performed after being stored in Inbox. Gradation adjustment is performed on the rasterized data before they This control is executed when the following is selected in user mode: Auto Adjust Gradation >...

  • Page 133: Auxiliary Control

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control 2-79 ■ Auxiliary Control ● Laser APC Control This control corrects laser output control value to prevent change of surface potential by laser ● Startup Contrast Potential (Vcont) Correction output. Contrast potential (Vcont) is corrected to keep a constant density and prevent light image caused by reduced toner charging amount in an energy-saving environment.
  • Page 134 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control 2-80 ● Two Dimension Shading Control Bright area potential Uneven potential on the Photosensitive Drum is corrected by laser exposure. characteristics( ) VL (V) Execution timing At the time of laser exposure (only when the two dimension shading control is ON. Default: VL0re Procedure 3) OFF)
  • Page 135 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control 2-81 ● White Band Control DC Controller PCB Oppositely-charged toner on the Developing Sleeve is forcibly applied on the Drum and collected by the Cleaning Unit. NOTE: Calculation Large-grained toner is less likely to be charged compared to small-grained toner and can be positively charged (opposite charging) in rare cases.
  • Page 136 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control 2-82 ● Black Band Control Control description 1) Black band described below is created on the Drum. This control maintains the cleaning performance by providing sufficient amount of toner to the 2) Black band is scraped by the Drum Cleaning Blade and toner is properly applied on the edge of the Cleaning Blade.
  • Page 137 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control 2-83 ● Low Duty Discharge Control In the case of continuous output of low duty image, this control consumes toner at non-image area to maintain the density stability. Execution timing While the video count for every page is accumulated, in the case that the average image duty is less than the threshold , the ongoing job is interrupted at the time of last rotation of a job or...

  • Page 138: Servicing

    Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Periodical Servicing List 2-84 Servicing ■ Periodical Servicing List Expected ■ Periodically Replaced Parts Parts/Area Name Remarks life* Expected COUNTER Toner Receptacle Tray Remove toner on the tray. Parts Name Parts Nunber Piece Remarks needed life*...

  • Page 139: When Replacing Parts

    Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts 2-85 ■ When Replacing Parts CAUTION: When replacing the Periodically Replaced Parts and Consumable Parts, be sure to clear the Be sure to adjust the dark side (density of the test print image) to be the light side. Parts Counter (COPIER >...
  • Page 140 Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts 2-86 Make the resin screws [A] and [C] a full turn clockwise. While referring to the When the rear side test print image is dark replacement procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly, install it to the main body, output NOTE: a test print and check the image.
  • Page 141 Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts 2-87 ● Pre-transfer Charging Assembly CAUTION: <Procedure of parts replacement> Since uneven density might occur, be sure to adjust by turning the 2 adjustment see "Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly," on p. 4-108. screws with the same amount.
  • Page 142 Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts 2-88 ● Drum 3) Affix the ID Label included in the drum to the inside of the Front Cover. <Procedure of parts replacement> see "Removing the Photosensitive Drum," on p. 4-122. <Procedure of adjustment>...

  • Page 143: Major Adjustments

    Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Major Adjustments 2-89 ● Drum Side Seals(Front and Rear) ● ETB <Procedure of parts replacement> <Procedure of parts replacement> see "Removing the Side Seal," on p. 4-128. • see "Removing the ETB Unit," on p. 4-137. <Procedure of adjustment>...

  • Page 144: Troubleshooting

    Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Troubleshooting 2-90 ■ Troubleshooting [Image Sample] ● Trailing Edge Shock Imaget Feed direction <Shock image located approx. 63mm [Location] 55mm from the trailing edge> [Cause] Lines occur on the image due to shock when distortion on the belt is released while rotation speed between the ETB and drum differs [Condition] When replacing the ETB...
  • Page 145 Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Troubleshooting 2-91 ● Uneven density correction by 2D shading 3) Output a halftone image with the following conditions and check if uneven density occurs. COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE 6 To correct uneven image density caused by uneven potential on the surface of the Drum. Select the cassette which the following paper is set: COPIER>TEST>PG>PG-PICK A3 (LDR) or larger.
  • Page 146 Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Troubleshooting 2-92 5) Check (T-shaped) halftone area of the output test print visually and adjust the area of CAUTION: uneven density. It is difficult to judge whether uneven potential of the Photosensitive Drum causes 5-1) Take a note to write down the values of the following service mode.
  • Page 147 Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Troubleshooting 2-93 5-3) After the adjustment, output a test print and check the image. 5-4) Adjust the target vertical scanning direction (1 to 27) which uneven density is seen. When uneven density is seen: Go to 5-3). After selecting "S-LINE1 to 4", select the target vertical scanning window (1 to 27), When uneven density is not seen: Procedure is ended.
  • Page 148 Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Troubleshooting 2-94 5-5) After the adjustment, output a test print and check the image to complete the ● Separation Failure Jam due to Deformation of Separation Claw procedure. [Location] Drum Separation Claw CAUTION: If the image cannot be adjusted correctly even with this adjustment procedure, reenter [Cause]...
  • Page 149 Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Troubleshooting 2-95 ● Uneven density [Cause] Uneven density occurs on the image because of uneven developing performance or change Feed Direction in drum characteristics due to wear. F-2-121 [Field Remedy] In the case of dark/light image at either the left or right side on the image in horizontal direction, adjust height of the Primary Charging Wire and check the output result.
  • Page 150 Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Troubleshooting 2-96 ● Smeared image [Image] [Cause] Feed Direction Excess toner is transferred on the paper that causes toner collapse at the time of fixing, which can generate smeared image on the image. The following are assumed causes of smeared <...

  • Page 151: Fixing

    Technology > Fixing > Overview > Characteristics 2-97 Fixing <IH (Induction Heating) method> Supplying high frequency current to the coil inside the Heater Unit generates a high frequency magnetic field around the coil. By this magnetic field, an eddy current (induction Overview current) runs through the Fixing Roller and the Fixing Roller generates electricity by itself.

  • Page 152: Specifications

    Technology > Fixing > Overview > Parts configuration 2-98 ■ Specifications ■ Parts configuration Item Function/method ● Cross-section view Fixing method IH fixing method Fixing Heater IH heater Fixing Cleaning Web takeup roller Fixing Roller O/D: 40mm Pressure Roller O/D: 38mm Control temperature (Japanese model) Fixing Cleaning...

  • Page 153: Drive Configuration

    Technology > Fixing > Overview > Drive configuration 2-99 ● Thermistor, Thermal Switch ■ Drive configuration Flux blocking plate Fixing Cleaning Web (Shutter) Level Sensor(PS45) Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid Fixing Shutter Motor Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 Fixing Motor (THM2) Fixing Sub Thermistor 2 Shutter Gear (THM3)
  • Page 154 Technology > Fixing > Overview > Drive configuration 2-100 Code Parts name Function/method Fixing Motor To control drive of the Fixing Motor Fixing Shutter Motor To control drive of the Shutter Fixing Cleaning Web Drive To control drive of the Cleaning Web Solenoid Fixing Toenail Jam Sensor To prevent scratches on Fixing Roller due to jam...

  • Page 155: Controls

    Technology > Fixing > Controls > Fixing temperature control 2-101 Controls ■ Fixing temperature control ● Overview ■ Overview To prevent fixing failure, temperature control of the Fixing Roller is executed with the following timing. Cleaning Web length detection Temperature control Overview Cleaning Web Temperature control during...
  • Page 156 Technology > Fixing > Controls > Fixing temperature control 2-102 ● Temperature control during startup <Low temperature environment startup mode> After it reaches the target temperature, the target temperature is maintained until Temperature is controlled to reach the standby temperature. completion of the potential control, and then the machine enters ready state.
  • Page 157 Technology > Fixing > Controls > Fixing temperature control 2-103 ● Temperature Control for Standby The control temperature depends on the environment temperature/country. The details on the control temperature are shown below. To provide measures against temperature rise of the coil/Main Body and save energy consumption, the target temperature is reduced step by step on a specified time basis until it •...
  • Page 158 Technology > Fixing > Controls > Fixing temperature control 2-104 ● Temperature control during printing • Normal environment 17 degC or higher The target temperature is reduced step by step on a specified time basis until it reaches a Time (minute) Destination Model Paper Type...
  • Page 159 Technology > Fixing > Controls > Fixing temperature control 2-105 ● Other temperature adjustments ● Related Error Code <Energy Saver mode> E000: Fixing Assembly low temperature error By pressing the energy saver key on the Control Panel, energy consumption is reduced by E001: Fixing Assembly high temperature error reducing the control temperature when the Fixing Unit is at standby state according to the E002: Fixing Assembly temperature rise error...

  • Page 160: Down Sequence Control

    Technology > Fixing > Controls > Down sequence control 2-106 ■ Down sequence control ● Control description This control has the 3 types of down sequences according to the execution timing. ● Overview 1) In the case of decrease in fixing temperature (during printing) In the case of great difference between the target temperature and the detected temperature When the fixing temperature drops during the job, the productivity is dropped or the job is at the start of printing or during printing, productivity is dropped to prevent fixing failure or...
  • Page 161 Technology > Fixing > Controls > Down sequence control 2-107 2) When printing is started and the paper type is switched ● Related Service Mode Because fixing temperature differs according to the paper type, switching the paper type • To change temperature threshold of down sequence with special paper causes downtime.

  • Page 162: Shutter Control

    Technology > Fixing > Controls > Shutter Control 2-108 ■ Shutter Control The shutter is set in the home position when printing is completed. < Home Position (HP)> ● Overview To prevent image failure and reduction in productivity caused by temperature rise at the edge, Shutter this machine introduces the Shutter (to shield magnetic flux;...

  • Page 163: Paper Anti-Wrapping Control

    Technology > Fixing > Controls > Paper Anti-wrapping Control 2-109 ● Related Error Code ■ Paper Anti-wrapping Control IH Shutter Motor error ● Overview E840-0001: When the Shutter failed to be moved to the specified position (failed to be at With this control, failure of the Fixing Assembly caused by paper wrapping around the Fixing normal state) despite 3-times retry operation Roller and the Pressure Roller is prevented.

  • Page 164: Thermistor Reciprocating Control

    Technology > Fixing > Controls > Thermistor reciprocating control 2-110 ● Control description ■ Thermistor reciprocating control In the case of delay jam at the fixing outlet, the DC Controller determines paper wrapping if To prevent scar on the Fixing Roller detected by the Fixing Main Thermistor (THM01) and the paper remains in the Fixing Assembly and executes the following.

  • Page 165: Upper Separation Claw Reciprocating Control

    Technology > Fixing > Controls > Cleaning web drive control 2-111 ■ Upper separation claw reciprocating control ■ Cleaning web drive control To prevent scar on the Fixing Roller by the Upper Separation Claw, the Upper Separation To prevent fixing offset, the residual toner on the surface of the Fixing Roller is removed with Claw is moved back and forth by 3mm in the direction of the Fixing Roller.

  • Page 166: Cleaning Web Length Detection

    Technology > Fixing > Controls > Cleaning web length detection 2-112 ● Related Error Code ■ Cleaning web length detection Error in connection of the Fixing Web Solenoid When the length of the Cleaning Web is reduced, the Web Level Detection Arm is moved in 005-0001 the direction of the arrow to block the light path of the Fixing Cleaning Web Level Detection Sensor (PS45).

  • Page 167: Protective Function

    Technology > Fixing > Controls > Protective function 2-113 ■ Protective function ● Detecting an Error Using the Thermistor In the event of the following, the machine will set the DC power (12 V) used to drive the AC relay (found on the fixing heater power supply PCB), thereby stopping the AC power to the fixing heater.

  • Page 168: Servicing

    Technology > Fixing > Servicing > Periodical Servicing List 2-114 Servicing ■ Periodical Servicing List Parts/Area Operation ■ Periodically Replaced Parts Piece Remarks Name Interval Parts name Parts Number Piece Expected Remarks Fixing inlet guide Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. Fixing Right Stay Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

  • Page 169: When Replacing Parts

    Technology > Fixing > Servicing > When Replacing Parts 2-115 ■ When Replacing Parts ● Fixing Roller <Procedure of parts replacement> see "Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper," on p. 4-186. <Procedure of adjustment> 1) Grease Application Apply approx.

  • Page 170: Troubleshooting

    Technology > Fixing > Servicing > Troubleshooting 2-116 ■ Troubleshooting ● Checking nip width In the case of paper wrinkle or fixing failure, check that the fixing nip width is within the ● Paper wrinkle specified range. Note that the fixing nip width of this equipment cannot be adjusted in the <Location>...

  • Page 171: Pickup / Feed System

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Overview 2-117 Pickup / Feed System Overview : Forced Paper Feed Control : Paper path ■ Overview : One Unit • Supported media (heavy paper) (52g/m2 -> 256g/m2) This feature is enabled by making gentler curve of the pre-registration path, reverse path and duplex merging path.

  • Page 172: Specifications

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Specifications 2-118 ■ Specifications Item Function/Method Paper Storage Front Loading Method Method Pickup Method Separation Retard Method Paper Feed Standard Center Paper Loading Left/Right Deck 1500 sheets (80 g/m2) Capacity Cassette 3/4 550 sheets (80 g/m2) Multi-purpose 100 sheets (80 g/m2)

  • Page 173: Parts Configuration

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts configuration 2-119 ■ Parts configuration PS No. Sensor No. Vertical Path Cover Open/Close Sensor PS52 PS51 PS10 PS20 PS67 PS47 PS29 PS64 Multi-purpose Cover Open/Close Sensor Fixing Toenail Jam Sensor Right Deck Paper Height Sensor Right Deck Paper Sensor Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor...
  • Page 174 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts configuration 2-120 ● Roller Fixing Roller Duplex Merging Roller Multi-purpose Tray Separation/Feed Roller Registration Roller Outer Delivery Roller Reverse Inlet Roller Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller Inner Delivery Roller Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Pressure roller Reverse Upper Roller Registration Front Roller...

  • Page 175: Drive Configuration

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Drive Configuration 2-121 ■ Drive Configuration Name Fixing Motor Right Deck Lifter Motor Left Deck Lifter Motor Right Deck Pickup Motor Cassette3/4 Pickup Motor Delivery Motor Reverse Motor Duplex Feed Right Motor Duplex Feed Left Motor Cassette3 Lifter Motor Cassette4 Lifter Motor...

  • Page 176: Paper Path

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Paper path 2-122 ■ Paper path Feeding path Delivery Flapper Multi Tray Reverse Flapper Duplex Flapper [3],[4] Option Pickup Left Deck Pigkup Right Deck Pigkup Cassette 3 Pickup Cassette 4 Pickup F-2-150 1-side face-up delivery, duplex face-down delivery 1-side face-down delivery, duplex printing...

  • Page 177: Interval Speed

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Interval speed 2-123 ■ Interval speed Model ImageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075/6065/6055 [mm/s] [ppm] :Pickup Speed Pickup speed :Vertical path/duplex speed Vertical path/duplex speed :Pre-registration speed Pre-registration speed :Post-registration speed Post-registration speed :Process speed Process speed :Delivery speed Delivery speed...

  • Page 178: Various Types Of Control

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Various types of control 2-124 ■ Various types of control Unit Contorol Basic Movement Fixing Assembly Secondary Transfer Unit Registration Unit Deck/Cassette detection Paper Size Detection Deck/cassette pickup unit Paper Level Detection Paper Detection Pickup Retry Control Pickup Retry Control...

  • Page 179: Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Basic Movement 2-125 Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit ● Cassette Cassette Feed ■ Basic Movement Roller Cassette Pickup When Deck/Cassette is installed, Motor drives to maintain the height which paper surface PS21 Roller /PS22...

  • Page 180: Deck/Cassette Detection

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Deck/Cassette detection 2-126 ■ Deck/Cassette detection ● Cassette Cassette is detected by Paper Size Detection Switch. When all actuators of the Paper Size Whether Deck/Cassette is installed is detected Detection Switch (SW14/SW16) are not pressed, it is detected as no cassette installed ●...

  • Page 181: Paper Size Detection

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Size Detection 2-127 ■ Paper Size Detection ● Cassette Paper size in cassette 3/4 is each detected by 2 paper size detection switches. ● Deck ON/OFF of 4-actuator in the Host Machine changes according to the Paper Size Detection Circular Plate/ Set in Service Mode.
  • Page 182 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Size Detection 2-128 ● Paper size detection Switch SW7/SW8 Paper Width Length Width SW7/SW8 Length SW9/SW10 Size (mm) (mm) 257.0 182.0 EXEC 267.0 184.0 270.0 195.0 A5-R 148.5 210.0 297.0 210.0...

  • Page 183: Paper Level Detection

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Level Detection 2-129 ■ Paper Level Detection Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS47) Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS49) Paper level is detected by two Paper Level sensors in each cassette Full ●...
  • Page 184 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Level Detection 2-130 ● Cassette • Full (100%~50%) Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 2 (PS70) Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS69) Paper Level Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS69) Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 2 (PS73) Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS72) Detection Lever...
  • Page 185 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Detection 2-131 ■ Paper Detection ● Cassette If paper is present, the Detection Lever is pushed upward when lifter ascends, and Paper Cassette 3 Paper Sensor (PS13) Cassette 4 Paper Sensor (PS14) Sensor is turned OFF.
  • Page 186 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Lifter Control 2-132 ■ Lifter Control ● Cassette Paper is lifted to the pickup position by the Lifter. Cassette 3 Upper Limit Sensor(PS68) Cassette 4 Upper Limit Sensor(PS71) In the machine configuration with the Deck / Cassette set, the Pickup Motor is driven to raise the Lifter to fit the paper level to the height of the pickup position.

  • Page 187: Pickup Retry Control

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Pickup Retry Control 2-133 ● Lifter Error Detection In case due to some reason the lifter keep ascending even the Paper Surface Height Sensor is turned ON, the Upper Limit Sensor is provided to prevent damage in this equipment due to the error in ascending.

  • Page 188: Multi-Purpose Tray Pickup Unit

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Basic Movement 2-134 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit 3) When the Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor drives, the Multi-purpose Pull Out Roller and the Multi-purpose Feed Roller/Multi-purpose Separation Roller will rotate, ■...

  • Page 189: Paper Size Detection

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Paper Detection 2-135 ■ Paper Size Detection ■ Paper Detection The setting is performed the Side Guide Plate and size code setting (or irregular size setting When paper is set, Paper Presence Detection Lever will be pushed, and the Multi-purpose assignment) by and the Control Panel Unit.

  • Page 190: Registration Unit

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Registration Unit > Pre-registration Control 2-136 Registration Unit Pickup ■ Pre-registration Control Stop position name Paper size Reference sensor Stop position Assembly Pre-registration stop Right Deck Size LTR (215.9mm) Vertical Path Vertical Path Roller 1 Pickup processing time can vary depending on the paper type and paper size in use as well position 1 Sensor1(PS24)

  • Page 191: Registration Control

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Registration Unit > Registration Deceleration Control 2-137 ■ Registration Control ■ Registration Deceleration Control The Registration Motor (M34) is rotated to make the image on the drum and the paper to be This control reduces speed of Multi-purpose Tray Registration Front Motor (M33) (Registration aligned at the specified position and feeds the paper to the Transfer Assembly.

  • Page 192: Registration Acceleration Control

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Transfer > Post-transfer Guide Attraction Control 2-138 Transfer ■ Registration Acceleration Control The Registration Motor (M34) is rotated to make the image on the drum and the paper to be ■ Post-transfer Guide Attraction Control aligned at the specified position and feeds the paper to the Transfer Assembly.

  • Page 193: Delivery/Reverse Unit

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Delivery/Reverse Unit > Basic Operation 2-139 Delivery/Reverse Unit Speed after Fixing Roller Process ■ Basic Operation Delivery speed Process speed speed ● Face-up Delivery Delivery Motor(M13) 1) The Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid (SL5) is turned ON to switch the feeding path to the Delivery Assembly side.
  • Page 194 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Delivery/Reverse Unit > Basic Operation 2-140 ● Face-down Delivery Reverse delivery Reverse delivery speed speed 1) The Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid (SL5) is turned OFF to switch the feeding path to the Delivery Assembly side. Delivery Delivery Motor speed...

  • Page 195: Duplex Unit

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Basic Operation 2-141 Duplex Unit Duplex reverse speed Duplex reverse speed ■ Basic Operation Process speed Stop Reverse Motor 1) The Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid (SL5) is turned OFF to switch the feeding path to the Stop (M14) Reverse Assembly side.

  • Page 196: Side Registration Control

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Side Registration Control 2-142 ■ Side Registration Control Duplex Outlet Roller Side Registration Motor(M16) In the case of printing the 2nd side of the 2-sided print, side registration displacement level is measured to adjust the write start timing and correct side registration.

  • Page 197: Circulation Quantity And Limit

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit 2-143 ■ Circulation quantity and limit The numbers in white background and the numbers in black background show each the first page and second page. ● Less than 314 mm in size/5 sheets in circulation (B5 to A4R) Registration stop position Pre-registration Pre-registration...
  • Page 198 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit 2-144 Pre-registration Duplex reverse stop position7 stop position F-2-189 2-144 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit...
  • Page 199 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit 2-145 ● Exceeds 314 mm in size/3 sheets in circulation (B4 to LDR inch(431.8)) Registration stop position Registration stop position Duplex stop position Pre-registration stop position 4 Pre-registration Pre-registration stop position 4...
  • Page 200 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit 2-146 Registration stop position F-2-191 2-146 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit...

  • Page 201: Jam Detection

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Jam Detection > Jam Code List 2-147 Jam Detection ■ Jam Code List PS52 PS20 PS67 PS29 PS28 PS64 PS36 PS35 PS65 PS24 PS66 PS19 PS32 PS25 PS21 PS26 PS33 PS22 PS27 F-2-192 2-147 Technology >...

  • Page 202: Other Jams

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Jam Detection > Jam Code List 2-148 ● Jam in Feed System ● Other Jams xx = 01: Delay, 02: Stationary, 0A: Residue Sensor Sensor name Jam type Yes: Detects, -: Does not detect 0B01 SW2 Front Door Open Detection Switch Door Open jam...

  • Page 203: Forced Paper Feed Control

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Jam Detection > Forced Paper Feed Control 2-149 ■ Forced Paper Feed Control If there is paper in the following place after jam is detected, the paper will be forcedly fed to downstream direction.This control suppresses paper damage during jam handling. :Forced Paper Feed Control F-2-193...

  • Page 204: Servicing

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Servicing > Troubleshooting 2-150 Servicing ■ Periodical Servicing List Expected ■ Periodically Replaced Parts Parts/Area Name Remarks life* None Feed Guide Remove paper lint with lint-free paper and cleaning tool. ■ Consumable Parts Pre-registration Guide Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

  • Page 205: External Auxiliary System

    Technology > External Auxiliary System > Overview > Power Supply Configuration 2-151 External Auxiliary System Overview ■ Power Supply Configuration ● Power Supply Configuration inside the Host Machine 3.3V Main Controller PCB 1 3.3V 3.3V Main Power Switch Front Door Open Multi Door Main Controller PCB 2 Detection Switch...

  • Page 206: Controls

    Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power supply control 2-152 Controls ● Power Configuration of the Reader Unit ■ Power supply control Motor ● Electric Power Management <Over View> Sensor Electric power shortage is prevented by equating the electric power in the machine. Capacitor for preventing the electric power shortage which is applied to the conventional LED Lamp CMOS PCB...

  • Page 207: Energy Saver Function

    Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power supply control 2-153 <Control description> ● Energy saver function This machine executes electric power management to prevent temporary power shortage. The electric power management detects current value of the entire product with the Current Deep Sleep PDL job occurs Sensor.
  • Page 208 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power supply control 2-154 ● Distribution of Power and the Switches The power of this machine is supplied to each load side by linking with the following switches, etc. A. 2-dimensional shading OFF(defolt*1) <Environment Switch: OFF>...
  • Page 209 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power supply control 2-155 B. 2-dimensional shading ON *1] <Environment Switch: OFF> Main Power sleep mode (low energy sleep mode (high energy Mode WarmUp(Recovery) Standby/Energy Saver Copy/Print consumption)*3 consumption)*3 Main SW Switch Cassette SW Drum Heater...
  • Page 210 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power supply control 2-156 <Environment Control> Environment control 1: The condition of the heater at the time of turning OFF the main power continues. Environment control 2: Whether to turn ON or OFF the heater is determined by the environment (moisture content) right before moving to sleep state, and the condition continues while the power is OFF or the machine is at sleep state.

  • Page 211: Fan Control

    Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Fan Control 2-157 ■ Fan Control ● Location of Fans ● Airflow FM17 FM17 FM16 Developing Assembly FM33 FM33 FM31 FM31 FM30 FM30 FM32 FM42 FM32 IH power supply unit FM41 Power Supply FM41 FM42 FM40...

  • Page 212: Counter Control

    Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Counter control 2-158 ● Fan Sequence ■ Counter control Count-up timing differs according to the following. WAIT Power DEEP NAME INTR STBY LSTR PRINT saving Sleep • Print mode (1-sided page, 2nd side of 2-sided page, 1st side of 2-sided page) Primary Charging Air-supply Fan •...
  • Page 213 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Counter control 2-159 Display number of each counter (in service mode) / item Country Display number of each counter (in service mode) / item Country Target Target Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 code code...

  • Page 214: Servicing

    Technology > External Auxiliary System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts 2-160 Servicing ■ When Replacing Parts ● DC Controller PCB ■ Periodically Replaced Parts Get in service mode to enter all the latest service mode values written on the label at the back Parts name Parts Number Piece...

  • Page 215: Troubleshooting

    Technology > External Auxiliary System > Servicing > Troubleshooting 2-161 ■ Troubleshooting 1) Open the DADF and loosen the 2 Fixation Screws securing the Arm Rotation Adjustment Ring. ● Adjusting rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm If rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm has become loose, retighten the Fixation Screws securing the Arm Rotation Adjustment Ring according to the following procedure.
  • Page 216 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Servicing > Troubleshooting 2-162 3) Pull out the Upright Control Panel and the Arm Shaft, and rotate the Arm Rotation Adjustment Ring to change the phase so that the Fixation Screws do not contact with the dents formed by tightening the screws.

  • Page 217: Meap

    Technology > MEAP > Changes > Addition of Functions 2-163 MEAP ■ Addition of Functions ● 3 functions Changes For the built-in applications in iR-ADV models, 3 functions (services) were added. These functions support the platform which was reinforced in terms of management. In detail, ■...

  • Page 218: Differences In Meap Application Data Management When Using New Functions

    Technology > MEAP > Changes > Addition of SMS Functions 2-164 ■ Differences in MEAP Application Data Management when Using ■ Addition of SMS Functions New Functions Due to the foregoing additional 3 functions, functions for MEAP application were added to SMS.

  • Page 219: Authentication Information Sharing Function

    Technology > MEAP > Changes > Authentication Information Sharing Function 2-165 ● Log management of MEAP application ■ Authentication Information Sharing Function Log management function which the MEAP application log can be downloaded and/or deleted ● Sharing the authentication information was added.

  • Page 220: Function Supporting Deep Sleep Mode

    Technology > MEAP > Checking the Operating Environment > SMS 2-166 Checking the Operating Environment ● Service mode For the reason of security, if not preferring to use Volatile Credential, it can be disabled using ■ Outline the service mode. (Persistent Credential cannot be disabled.) Service switch can be found in the following.

  • Page 221: Sso-H Management

    Technology > MEAP > Checking the Operating Environment > SSO-H Management 2-167 ■ SSO-H Management System environments for administrator and ordinary user Java Runtime When using SSO-H for the login service, required system environments are different in Operating System Supported browser Environment domain authentication or local device authentication.
  • Page 222 Windows Server 2008 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 - When not using imageWARE/iW Accounting Manager, a user belonging to “Canon Windows Server 2008 R2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 Peripheral Admins” group on Active Directory will be authorized as the domain Mac OS X v10.3...

  • Page 223: Setting Up The Network

    Technology > MEAP > Setting Up the Network > Network configuration process 2-169 Setting Up the Network Note: In iR-ADV series, the System Manager ID and the System PIN are configured by ■ Network configuration process default, so “Network” and the items that follow are grayed out and cannot be selected. Return to the top screen, press “Login”...

  • Page 224: Login To Sms

    Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > Outline 2-170 Login to SMS CAUTION: ■ Outline • The setting [ Use HTTP ] is not actually enabled/disabled until you have restarted the device. SMS login may be done by entering a password for authentication, or by authentication via •...

  • Page 225: Key Pair And Server Certificate When Using Encrypted Ssl Communication

    Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > Login by Password Authentication 2-171 ■ Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted SSL ■ Login by Password Authentication Communication In the SMS login window, enter the password for authentication. Only one password can be registered with SMS.

  • Page 226: Login By Rls Authentication

    Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > Login by RLS Authentication 2-172 2) If the wrong password is entered, the following window is displayed. The user's system ■ Login by RLS Authentication administrator may have changed the password, so confirm the password with the system Login without using the SMS login window but by entering the user ID and password for administrator.
  • Page 227 In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO-H, if you log in SMS with RLS - In the case of domain authentication, users belonging to the Canon Peripheral Admins authentication, no selection is displayed although it is the screen to change the login Group.

  • Page 228: Initial Display Languages Of Sms

    Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Outline 2-174 Setting the method to login to SMS ■ Initial Display Languages of SMS SMS supports English and Japanese. Display language can be changed with selecting by the ■...

  • Page 229: Setting For Login By Password Authentication

    Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Setting for login by Password Authentication 2-175 ■ Setting for login by Password Authentication 3) Click [Start] or [Stop] button shown in Status field of SMS Installer Service (Password Authentication) to check if the status is changed.

  • Page 230: Setting For Login By Rls Authentication

    Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Setting for login by RLS Authentication 2-176 ■ Setting for login by RLS Authentication 3) Click on [Start] or [Stop] button shown on Status field of SMS Installer Service (Remote Login Service Authentication) to check if the status is changed.

  • Page 231: Checking Meap Application Management Page

    Technology > MEAP > Checking MEAP Application Management Page > About MEAP Application Management Page 2-177 Checking MEAP Application Management Page CAUTION: ■ About MEAP Application Management Page In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO-H, if you log in SMS with RLS authentication, no selection is displayed although it is the screen to change the login Application Management page shows [resource information] for information of the whole method.

  • Page 232: Starting And Stopping A Meap Application

    Technology > MEAP > Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application > Procedure to start and stop a MEAP application 2-178 Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application ■ Procedure to start and stop a MEAP application 1) Log in to the SMS. (Refer to 'Login to SMS' in this manual.) 2) Click [Application List].

  • Page 233: Checking The Platform Information

    Technology > MEAP > MEAP Specifications > Mechanism 2-179 Checking the Platform Information MEAP Specifications ■ The check procedure of the platform information ■ What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)? This screen allows users to check MEAP-Contents versions, MEAP Specifications for the MEAP Specifications is one of the information required to judge whether MEAP applications device and others.
  • Page 234 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Specifications > Mechanism 2-180 Enterprise Service Manager, matching of MEAP Specifications is executed on the side of Product Name Initial MEAP SpecVer Remarks MEAP platform machine. The machine which doesn't support the version declared by the iR-ADV C2030 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, Ver.10.xx or later...

  • Page 235: Meap Application System Information

    Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Checking the System Information of a MEAP Application with SMS 2-181 MEAP Application System Information Description 44 imageRUNNER / iR ADVANCE Series Remote Address Book Supported, RemoteFAX Supported. ■ Outline 45 Addition of API that allows acquisition of the HID installation status 46 Multilingualization of the USB keyboard of the System Driver Information about an application installed in the device is called MEAP application system 47 Addition of API which executes a print order from the MEAP application of the IMI encryption...

  • Page 236: Printing The System Information Of A Meap Application

    1) Select [ Settings/ Registration] > [ Management Settings] > [ License/ Other] > [MEAP Status: Resolved Settings] > [ Print System Information] . Installed on: Tue Oct 21 14:00:11 GMT+09:00 2003 Vendor : Canon Inc. License Status : Installed Note: Maximum Memory Usage : 1024...

  • Page 237: Installing An Application

    In doing so, he/she needs to register the license access number of the application and the serial number of the device. http://www.canon.com/lms/license/ 2-183 Technology > MEAP > Installing an Application > Resource...

  • Page 238: Procedure To Install Applications

    Technology > MEAP > Installing an Application > Procedure to install applications 2-184 ■ Procedure to install applications CAUTION: 1) Long on to SMS. • You cannot install only the license. 2) Click [Install MEAP Application] on the menu. • You will not be able to install the application without using the appropriate license. Be sure to select its license file.

  • Page 239: Adding A License File

    Technology > MEAP > Adding a License File > Procedure adding a license file 2-185 Adding a License File 8) Upon installation completed, click [To MEAP Application Management] button shown on the screen to view MEAP Application Management page. ■ Procedure adding a license file 1) Log on to SMS.
  • Page 240 Technology > MEAP > Adding a License File > Procedure adding a license file 2-186 3) In [Application / License Information] page shown on the screen, click [License 4) Click [ Browse ] button, and select the license file you want to install. Management ] button.

  • Page 241: Disabling A License File

    Technology > MEAP > Disabling a License File > Procedure disabling a license file (suspending a license) 2-187 Disabling a License File 2) Click the name of the application that you want to disable. ■ Procedure disabling a license file (suspending a license) CAUTION: •...

  • Page 242: Downloading / Removing An Invalidated License File

    Technology > MEAP > Downloading / Removing an Invalidated License File > Procedure downloading / removing an invalidated license file 2-188 Downloading / Removing an Invalidated License File 4) License Management page appears. Click [Disable] button. ■ Outline You must remove the invalidated license file before uninstalling an application. If reinstallation is a possibility, you may download the license file to a PC for storage.
  • Page 243 Technology > MEAP > Downloading / Removing an Invalidated License File > Procedure downloading / removing an invalidated license file 2-189 3) Check Application/ License Information page appears. 7) To delete, click [Delete] button. 4) On Application / License Information page, click [License Management] button. F-2-257 5) License Management page appears.

  • Page 244: Outline

    Technology > MEAP > License for forwarding > Procedure to create license for forwarding 2-190 Reusable license License for forwarding ■ Outline ■ Outline When reinstalling, Disable License file should be downloaded (see Chapter 0, “Disabling a When the device is replaced due to lease up or trouble, it is possible to continue using the License File .”...
  • Page 245 Technology > MEAP > License for forwarding > Procedure to create license for forwarding 2-191 3) Specify the application to be forwarded. 5) The window to confirm whether to create a transfer licence will be displayed. Click [OK]. F-2-265 6) Icon of license file for forwarding is displayed in the box of license file downloading. Click [Download].
  • Page 246 Technology > MEAP > License for forwarding > Procedure to create license for forwarding 2-192 7) The dialogue [File Download] is displayed. Click [Save]. 11) Since this downloaded transfer license is the file only to prove the license invalidation, it cannot be used for installation to the other device as it is. Send the transfer license to the service support contact of your nearest sales company to request issuance of the new license for installation in the new device.

  • Page 247: Uninstalling An Application

    Technology > MEAP > Uninstalling an Application > Procedure to uninstall an application 2-193 Uninstalling an Application 3) Click [Uninstall] button for the application to be uninstalled. ■ Procedure to uninstall an application CAUTION: • To uninstall a MEAP application, the license status should be set to “Not Installed” (to be deleted).

  • Page 248: Login Service

    Technology > MEAP > Login Service > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview 2-194 Login Service ■ Default Authentication overview This login service is selected when the department ID management is enabled or no ■ About Login Service authentication function is set. Set the department ID management to [ON] on Setting / The login service is started up to authenticate the user when MEAP-enabled iR device is Registration (Additional Functions mode) of this device and register 7-digit ID and PIN by booted up.

  • Page 249: Authentication Methods Of Sso-H

    Technology > MEAP > Login Service > Authentication methods of SSO-H 2-195 ■ Authentication methods of SSO-H Differences from conventional SSO Domain B Domain C Domain B Domain C SSO-H can use multiple authentication methods, and the user can toggle between them from a Web browser.

  • Page 250: Access Mode In Sites

    System Manager by allocating IDs set on SA to domain authentication managers Management Plug-in are required. If domain authentication is selected as the (users belonging to Canon Peripheral Admins group). However, SSO-H does not support this authentication method without linkage to these systems, login will be disabled and function.
  • Page 251 Technology > MEAP > Login Service > Access Mode in Sites 2-197 ● Settings for access mode in sites Note: Switching between site internal access mode/ non site internal access mode, as well as • The Active Directory subnet is assumed to be the same subnet as the device sub-net. •...

  • Page 252: Environment Confirmation

    Technology > MEAP > Login Service > Specification of SSO-H 2-198 1) SSO-Tokyo acquires site lists from Active Directories. ■ Specification of SSO-H Note, however, that the Active Directories accessed in order to acquire site lists are in the Item Specification order in which they were returned by DNS, so there is no guarantee that the same Active No.

  • Page 253: Changing Login Services

    Technology > MEAP > Changing Login Services > Steps to Change Login Services 2-199 Changing Login Services 3) When login service application you have selected turns to Start after Restart, restart the device. ■ Steps to Change Login Services 1) Click [ Enhanced System Application Management] on [System Management ]. F-2-279 CAUTION: In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO-H, if you log in SMS with RLS...

  • Page 254: Initializing The Password

    1) Get the switch license for initializing the password. Request the support of the regional headquarters of the Canon for switch license for In the case of MEAP-installed devices, the application is license-managed, so the application initializing the password presenting the device serial number.

  • Page 255: Backup Item Automatically Copied

    Technology > MEAP > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST > Requirements for Backup Using the SST 2-201 ■ Backup Item Automatically Copied ■ Requirements for Backup Using the SST ● The following data are backed up using SST: The following conditions must be met for use of the function: The following data are backed up (saved as Meapbackup.bin) using SST.

  • Page 256: Procedure For Backing Up The Meap Application Area Using Sst

    Technology > MEAP > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST > Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST 2-202 ■ Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST 4) Connecting the device using SST When starting SST, select the target device type as Single and click [Start] button.

  • Page 257: Procedures To Restore Backup Data

    Technology > MEAP > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST > Procedures to Restore Backup Data 2-203 6) Saving backup data ■ Procedures to Restore Backup Data Upon the backup data transferred to the PC, enter an appropriate file name and click [OK] 1) Connecting to the device to save the backup data on the PC.

  • Page 258: Formatting And Replacing The Hdd

    MEAP application installed. In the support departments of regional headquarters of Canon, all license files of the applications that have been issued are filed according to device serial numbers, enabling you to obtain a series of license files through a single screen as long as you can identify the serial number of the device in question.

  • Page 259: Hdd Replacement Procedure

    Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > HDD replacement procedure 2-205 ■ HDD replacement procedure ● If the MEAP application area can be backed up If the MEAP application area can be backed up, it can be recovered after replacing the HDD ●...

  • Page 260: Meap Safe Mode (Level 2)

    Technology > MEAP > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2) > Starting in Safe Mode 2-206 MEAP Safe Mode (level 2) 3) Press button for several times until [MEAPSAFE] button is shown. Click [MEAPSAFE] button. ■ Outline Use safe mode if you need to start up the system without worrying about extra applications. It will start up only those system software files (including SMS) that normally start up as default files while preventing MEAP applications and the like from starting up.

  • Page 261: How To Cancel Meap Safe Mode

    Technology > MEAP > Setting HTTP port for MEAP application (level 2) > Outline 2-207 Setting HTTP port for MEAP application (level 2) ■ How to cancel MEAP SAFE mode If you want to end safe mode, repeat the steps but change '1' to '0' in step -4 and restart the ■...

  • Page 262: Port Setup Procedure Of Http Server

    Technology > MEAP > Setting HTTP port for MEAP application (level 2) > Port setup procedure of HTTP Server 2-208 ■ Port setup procedure of HTTP Server 4) Press the port number to specify on the control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button.

  • Page 263: Port Setup Procedure Of Https Server

    Technology > MEAP > Setting HTTP port for MEAP application (level 2) > Port setup procedure of HTTPS Server 2-209 ■ Port setup procedure of HTTPS Server 5) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then, restart the device.

  • Page 264: Using Usb Devices

    Technology > MEAP > Using USB Devices > USB Driver 2-210 Using USB Devices Operating mode Software keyboard Conventional USB System driver settings [Use MEAP application keyboard enabled MEAP supported MEAP ■ USB Driver driver as USB input (System Driver/ application application device]...
  • Page 265 Technology > MEAP > Using USB Devices > USB Driver 2-211 ● Specifications for the use of USB keyboards Note: Characters that could be entered on the software keyboard displayed on the conventional You can display/check the used driver setting at “USB device report print” described below regardless of whether it is registered from a manifest file or is registered from control panel can be entered using a USB connected keyboard.

  • Page 266: Initialization Of Meap Driver Priority Registration

    Technology > MEAP > Using USB Devices > USB Device report print 2-212 ■ Initialization of MEAP driver priority registration 4) Press [OK] button to restart this device. When any trouble occurs regarding USB driver settings and it is necessary to reset the setting information, you can reset the MEAP driver preference registration by using service mode.
  • Page 267 Technology > MEAP > Using USB Devices > USB Device report print 2-213 3) Press button for several times until [USBH-PRT] is shown. Press [USBH-PRT] Example of output result button. ******************************** *** USB Device report print *** ******************************** USB device information T: Bus=05 Lev=01 Prnt=01 Port=01 Cnt=01 Dev#= 4 Spd=480 MxCh= 0 D: Ver=2.00 Cls=00(>ifc) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS=64 #Cfgs= 1 P: Vendor=04bb ProdID=0c2a Rev=bb.03...
  • Page 268 Technology > MEAP > Using USB Devices > USB Device report print 2-214 P : Product Right or wrong of report output Product information of USB devices is shown. Vendor ID and Product ID can be recognized Connecting device User installation Report printing here.

  • Page 269: Reference Material

    Local UI or Web. Esplet is a coined (License Management iR device. LMS is the server issuing [License Files] as well as license Application) word created by Canon, consisting of [Espresso] or Italian coffee and [let] System) access numbers. derived from Applet/Service.
  • Page 270 Technology > MEAP > Reference material > Glossary 2-216 Terms & Acronyms Definitions and Explanations Terms & Acronyms Definitions and Explanations MEAP Specifications MEAP Spec Version, the term used for the SDK. The version number that The kit containing information and tools required for software development. (MEAP Spec Version) shows the APIs of the MEAP platform other than CPCA, such as network (Software...

  • Page 271: Option For Exclusive Individual Measure

    Technology > MEAP > Option for exclusive individual measure > Error at starting up the MEAP application/Setting to hide JAM screen (level 2) 2-217 Option for exclusive individual measure ■ Error at starting up the MEAP application/Setting to hide JAM screen (level 2) ■...

  • Page 272: Embedded Rds

    Technology > Embedded RDS > Product Overview > Major Functions 2-218 Embedded RDS ■ Features and benefits E-RDS embedded with a network module in advance can realize a front-end processing Product Overview of e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system without attaching any extra hardware equipment.

  • Page 273: Limitations

    Technology > Embedded RDS > Service cautions 2-219 Limitations Service cautions ■ Service Mode Menu Transmission Function 1) After performing the following service actions, it is necessary to perform initalizing E-RDS settings : [SERVICE MODE] > [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] and 1) At the time of transmission when an alarm / service call error is detected, even if the alarm communication test : [SERVICE MODE] >...

  • Page 274: E-Rds Setup

    Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Confirmation and preparation in advance 2-220 E-RDS Setup (3) Network settings Based on the results of the information obtained in (2) Advance preparations, make the iR ■ Confirmation and preparation in advance device network related settings in accordance with the following procedures.
  • Page 275 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Confirmation and preparation in advance 2-221 3. When DNS settings and proxy settings are not made, touch the [Close] button to 3. Set the DNS server address based on the result obtained in Information item 2 under reboot the device.
  • Page 276 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Confirmation and preparation in advance 2-222 4) Proxy Settings e) Set the following items based on the result obtained in Information item 4 under 1. Select [TCP/IP Settings] from breadcrumbs of the left columns, and then Touch it. "(2) Advance preparations".

  • Page 277: E-Rds-Related Setting Items

    Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > E-RDS-related setting items 2-223 4. Touch the [Close] button. ■ E-RDS-related setting items ● E-RDS setting items Item Description E-RDS Set use/no use of E-RDS function ([Lv.1] COPIER > Function > INSTALL) 0: Function not used / 1: Function used e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system to send device information, counter data, error statuses to the...

  • Page 278: Steps To E-Rds Settings

    Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings 2-224 ● SERVICE CALL BUTTON setting items ■ Steps to E-RDS settings Item Description 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. SCALL-SW Display/hide of repair request button 1) Press [Settings/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel. ([Lv.1] COPIER >...
  • Page 279 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings 2-225 2. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] and touch the [OK] button. (2) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [CA-KEY] and touch the [OK] button. This operation initializes the E-RDS settings to factory setting values.
  • Page 280 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings 2-226 6. Touch the numeric button [1] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1) and 7. Select [COM-TEST] and then touch [OK]. touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.) This initiates the communication test between the device and the UGW.

  • Page 281: Steps To Service Call Button Settings

    Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings 2-227 ■ Steps to Service Call button settings NOTE: When the function is enabled, the [Service Call] button is displayed on the bottom of the ● Settings to display the service call button counter check screen (displayed by touching the counter check button).
  • Page 282 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings 2-228 3. Touch the numeric button [1] or [0] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1 2. Touch the [Select/ Request] button. or 0) and touch the [OK] button.

  • Page 283: Steps To Service Browser Settings

    Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Browser settings 2-229 ● Steps for settings of service call cancellation ■ Steps to Service Browser settings 1. Touch the [Counter Check] button on the control panel to display the counter check screen, 1.

  • Page 284: Initializing E-Rds Settings

    Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Initializing E-RDS settings 2-230 3. Reboot the device. ■ Initializing E-RDS settings It is possible to return E-RDS Settings to factory-shipments value. 4. Make sure that "1 (: ACTIVE)" is set under [COPIER] > [Display] > [USER] > [BRWS-STS]. ●...

  • Page 285: Faq

    Technology > Embedded RDS > FAQ 2-231 • When a SOAP transmission error occurs to postServiceModeMenu (only when settings are changed), service mode menu data is obtained and transmitted for every retry. No.1 • When a SOAP transmission error occurs to postBrowserInfo (only when the license status Q: In what case does a communication test with UGW fail? is changed in the Web browser option), browser information is saved in retry information A: The following cases can be considered in the becoming case.
  • Page 286 Technology > Embedded RDS > FAQ 2-232 No.9 Transmission timing Transmitting data Error retry Q: How does E-RDS operate while the device is placed in the sleep mode? When a value is set to [COPIER - ADJUST] COPIER ADJUST subordinate’s Service mode menu. A: While being in Real Deep Sleep, and if data to be sent is in E-RDS, the system wakes up (Transmission will be done at 60 min, later of asleep, then starts to send the data to the UGW.

  • Page 287: Troubleshooting

    Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting 2-233 Troubleshooting Transmission Transmission timing Detailed procedure Error occurs information No.1 When the Web browser 1) When the power is Service browser mode: Retransmission Symptom: A communication test (COM-TEST) results NG! option license is entered / turned ON, check the Enabling [Active] or is repeated...
  • Page 288 Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting 2-234 (b) Select [TCP/IP Settings] from breadcrumbs of the left columns, and then Touch it. F-2-346 F-2-348 3) Confirmation from another PC connected to same network. (a) Request the user to ping the main unit from a PC connected to same network. (c) Select [TCP/IP Settings] >...
  • Page 289 Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting 2-235 Remedy2: Troubleshooting using communication log 3) When each line is selected, the communication log detailed screen is displayed as shown 1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. in the figure below. (Example: No.05) 1) Press [Settings/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.

  • Page 290: Error Code And Strings

    Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings 2-236 Error code and strings No.3 Symptom: Registration information of an E-RDS is once deleted from the UGW server, and is The following error information is output in the communication error log details display screen. re-registered after that.
  • Page 291 Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings 2-237 No. Code Error strings Cause Remedy No. Code Error strings Cause Remedy 10 8xxx Server certificate The server certificate Check that the value of URL of 18 8xxx Server response Due to network congestion, If this error occurs when the 2029...
  • Page 292 Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings 2-238 No. Code Error strings Cause Remedy 32 8xxx Internal Schedule is The schedule data in the Perform a communication test 0207 - broken inside of E-RDS is not right. (COM-TEST). 0208 33 8xxx Operation is not...

  • Page 293: Updater

    CDS. 4) Download • MEAP Application/System Option Installation firmware Canon Inc. By linking devices to CDS and License Management System (providing the function to Firmware Upload Updater Firmware manage licenses; hereinafter LMS), applications can be installed in devices via Updater,...

  • Page 294: Installing Meap Application/System Option

    LMS-linked MEAP Application/System Option Installation 1) Manually execute If an imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device is connected to the external network, user or Updater. Canon Inc. service technician can gain access to CDS from User mode to install a MEAP application Firmware Upload Updater Firmware or a system option.

  • Page 295: System Configuration

    User Sales User Authentication Manual Company License Readme Access No. Manual 3) Create LF Upload 1) Enter LAN Application/License Canon Inc. Application Updater Firmware Application Business eRDS Firmware 4) Transmit LF Group imageRUNNER ADVANCE Service Command for Firmware Distribution Technician...

  • Page 296: List Of Functions

    Technology > Updater > Distribution Flow > Firmware Installation Flow 2-242 List of Functions Distribution Flow ■ Firmware Installation Flow The matrix below shows the list of functions provided by Updater. Service User Remote UGW- Service technicians provide firmware install services in the following 4 methods. Category Function Mode...

  • Page 297: Meap Application/System Option Installation Flow

    Technology > Updater > Limitations and Cautions > Cautions 2-243 Limitations and Cautions ■ MEAP Application/System Option Installation Flow MEAP application/system option installation method using service mode is not provided. ■ Limitations Be sure to use the user mode to install. Changing Date/Time on Device : Operator of each company : User operation...
  • Page 298 Technology > Updater > Limitations and Cautions > Cautions 2-244 Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function Firmware update will be triggered only after the following jobs are completed. This is the Updater-specific specification. Job/Function Receiving Printing Queued print Sending Queued send type jobs...

  • Page 299: Overview Of Preparation

    Technology > Updater > Setting Sales Company’s HQ 2-245 Overview of Preparation Setting Sales Company’s HQ The following should be prepared before using Updater. When using devices input in the markets listed below, the default setting of Sales Company’s • For updating of firmware HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS.

  • Page 300: Network Settings

    Technology > Updater > Network Settings > Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server 2-246 Network Settings ■ Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server This section describes how to confirm the URL setting of the distribution server. ■ Connecting to External Network The method of connecting to external network is similar to a normal network connection 1.
  • Page 301 Technology > Updater > Network Settings > Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server 2-247 3. Press [Software Management Settings] button. 5. Ensure to enter “https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif” in the field beside the [Delivery Server URL] button. If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field, click [Delivery Server URL] button to show the virtual keypad.

  • Page 302: Communication Test

    Technology > Updater > Network Settings > Communication Test 2-248 ■ Communication Test 3. Press [Software Management Settings] button. This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution server and/or the file server. NOTE: CDS and RDS are another servers.You need the communication test of CDS by all means even if You succeed in a communication test of the Embedded RDS.

  • Page 303: Enabling Ugw Link

    Technology > Updater > Enabling UGW Link 2-249 Enabling UGW Link 5. Press [Yes] button. When installing the firmware in the method of “UGW-linked Download and Update” or “UGW- linked Download”, the following should be set before actually using UGW link. Setting of Device COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-UGW Service Mode...

  • Page 304: Enabling [Update Firmware] Button Of User Mode

    Technology > Updater > Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode 2-250 Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode To allow users to install firmware using Updater, the setting of firmware installation should be set to ON for users in advance.

  • Page 305: Enabling [Manual Update] Button Of User Mode (Remote Ui)

    Technology > Updater > Enabling [Manual Update] Button of User Mode (Remote UI) 2-251 Enabling [Manual Update] Button of User Mode (Remote UI) To allow users to install firmware from Updater using the file on Local PCs, the setting of firmware installation should be set to ON for users in advance.

  • Page 306: System Management Operations

    Technology > System Management Operations > Various Setting > Setting URL of Distribution Server 2-252 System Management Operations 4. Press [Settings] button. Various Setting ■ Setting URL of Distribution Server This section describes how to set URL of the distribution server. 1.

  • Page 307: Setting Log Level

    Technology > System Management Operations > Various Setting > Setting Log Level 2-253 ■ Setting Log Level 4. Press [Settings] button. This section describes how to set system log levels. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 1). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel. 2).

  • Page 308: Displaying Logs

    Technology > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs > Update Logs 2-254 Displaying Logs 5. Select a log level from [Log Level] dropdown list. ■ Update Logs This section describes how to confirm System Option/MEAP Application Installation Logs and Firmware Update Logs. 1.

  • Page 309: System Logs

    Technology > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs > System Logs 2-255 4. Press [Select Log Display] button. 6. System Option/MEAP Application Installation Logs and Firmware Update Logs are shown. Press [OK] button to exit this operation. F-2-381 5. Press [Display Update Logs] button. F-2-383 ■...
  • Page 310 Technology > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs > System Logs 2-256 3. Press [Software Management Settings] button. 5. Press [Display System Logs] button. F-2-384 F-2-386 4. Press [Select Log Display] button. 6. Updater internal logs are displayed. Press [OK] button to exit this operation. F-2-385 F-2-387 NOTE:...

  • Page 311: Communication Test

    Technology > System Management Operations > Communication Test 2-257 Communication Test 4. Press [Test Communication] button. This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution server and/or the file server. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 1).
  • Page 312 Technology > System Management Operations > Communication Test 2-258 6. Upon the communication test completed, the communication test result screen is shown. Press [OK] button to exit this operation. F-2-391 2-258 Technology > System Management Operations > Communication Test...

  • Page 313: Upgrading Updater

    Technology > System Management Operations > Formatting Hard Disk 2-259 Upgrading Updater Formatting Hard Disk The firmware installed in the device should be also upgraded when upgrading Updater. See Since Updater is a MEAP application, its contents can be temporarily saved in the MEAP "Overview"...

  • Page 314: How To Replace Controller Boards

    Technology > System Management Operations > How to Replace Devices 2-260 How to Replace Controller Boards How to Replace Devices The steps are different depending on which of 2 controller boards are to be replaced. All settings should be set again because no data are inherited. See "Overview of Preparation" •...

  • Page 315: Faq On Installing Firmware

    Technology > System Management Operations > FAQ on Installing Firmware 2-261 FAQ on Installing Firmware No.4 Q: In the course of “UGW-linked download”, what will happen if the user downloads the No.1 firmware before the service technician update the firmware downloaded with “UGW-linked Q: Is it also possible to downgrade firmware with using CDS? download”...

  • Page 316: Faq On Installing Meap Application/System Option

    Technology > System Management Operations > FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option 2-262 FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option No.9 Q: Can we cancel the operation during firmware download? No.1 A: Yes. [Cancel] button is shown. Q: What happens if a MEAP application is installed in the system with insufficient HDD free space? A: An error message is shown.

  • Page 317: Faq On General Matters Of Updater

    Technology > System Management Operations > FAQ on General Matters of Updater 2-263 FAQ on General Matters of Updater No.2 Q: How can operations using Updater be masked on the users' side? No.1 A: Be sure to perform the following from the service mode. Q: What preparation is needed in each installation method? •...

  • Page 318: Periodic Service

    Periodic Service ■ Periodical Service Operation Item Periodic Service...
  • Page 319 Periodic Service > Periodical Service Operation Item Periodical Service Operation Item ♦: Replacement (Periodical replacement) ●: Replacement (Consumable parts) Δ: Cleaning ×: Lubrication □: Adjustment ■: Inspection Interval No. Category Part Name Part No Counter Remark Process Primary Charging Assembly FM3-7288 ●...
  • Page 320 Periodic Service > Periodical Service Operation Item ♦: Replacement (Periodical replacement) ●: Replacement (Consumable parts) Δ: Cleaning ×: Lubrication □: Adjustment ■: Inspection Interval No. Category Part Name Part No Counter Remark Image FC8-7160 ● DRBL-1 TR-BLT Formation Transfer Roller FC8-7159 ●...
  • Page 321 Periodic Service > Periodical Service Operation Item ♦: Replacement (Periodical replacement) ●: Replacement (Consumable parts) Δ: Cleaning ×: Lubrication □: Adjustment ■: Inspection Interval No. Category Part Name Part No Counter Remark Pickup/ Upper Separation Claw FB5-3625 ● DRBL-1 DLV-UCLW Clean this part when it is not replaced.

  • Page 322: Parts Replacement And Clearning

    Parts Replacement and Clearning ■ List of Parts ■ Main Controller ■ Laser Exposure System ■ Image Formation System ■ Fixing ■ Pickup/Feed System ■ External Auxiliary System Parts Replacement and Clearning...

  • Page 323: List Of External / Internal Cover

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of External / Internal Cover List of Parts Name Service Parts No. Reference [1] Upper Cover FM3-9953 [2] Upper Left Cover FC9-0376 List of External / Internal Cover [3] Operation Panel FM3-8262 [4] Upper Right Cover FC8-2366...
  • Page 324 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of External / Internal Cover Name Service Parts No. Reference [17] Upper Rear Cover FC9-5464 [32] [18] Left Rear Cover FC9-0080 [19] Rear Upper Cover FC8-7016 [34] [31] [20] Rear Lower Cover FC8-9566 [17] [33]...

  • Page 325: List Of Main Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit List of Main Unit Developing Assembly Laser Scanner Unit Process Unit Waste Toner Feed Unit Fixing Assembly Hopper Unit F-4-3 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit...
  • Page 326 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit Name Service Parts No. Reference [1] Waste Toner Feed Unit FM4-0899 "Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit"(page 4-168). [2] Laser Scanner Unit FM3-7526 "Removing the Laser Scanner Unit"(page 4-93). [3] Hopper Unit FM4-0879 "Removing the Hopper Unit"(page 4-159).
  • Page 327 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit Fixing Feed Unit Right Deck Pickup Unit Left Deck Pickup Unit Outer Delivery Unit Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit Vertical Path Unit Registration Unit Cassette 3 Pickup Unit Cassette 4 Pickup Unit ETB Unit Reverse Delivery Unit...
  • Page 328 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit Name Service Parts No. Reference [7] Outer Delivery Unit FM3-7379 [8] Fixing Feed Unit [9] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit FM3-7367 [10] Left Deck Pickup Unit FM4-0942 "Removing the Left Deck Pickup Unit"(page 4-215). [11] Right Deck Pickup Unit FM4-0941 "Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit"(page 4-216).
  • Page 329 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit Drum Drive Unit Controller Box Developing Drive Unit Main Drive Unit Flat Control Panel Unit Vertical Path Cassette ETB Drive Unit Pickup Drive Unit Left Deck Drive Unit F-4-5 Parts Replacement and Clearning >...
  • Page 330 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit Name Service Parts No. Reference [19] Flat Control Panel Unit FM3-8262 [20] Controller Box [21] Drum Drive Unit FM4-0904 "Removing the Drum Drive Unit"(page 4-171). [22] Developing Drive Unit FM3-7386 "Removing the Developing Drive Unit"(page 4-173).

  • Page 331: Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts 4-10 Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts ■ Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts Developing Roller Developing Roller Developing Cylinder Pre-exposure Scraper Pre-exposure Scraper Drum Side Seal (R) Drum Cleaning Blade...
  • Page 332 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts 4-11 Name Main Unit Service Parts No. Reference Adjustment during parts replacement [1] Developing Roller Developing Assembly FB6-6559 "Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller"(page 4-132).
  • Page 333 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts 4-12 Primary Charging Assembly Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Primary Charging Wire Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner...
  • Page 334 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts 4-13 Name Main Unit Service Parts Reference Adjustment during parts replacement [1] Primary Charging Assembly Process Unit FM3-7288 "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly"(page 4-97). "Primary Charging Assembly"(page 5-7).
  • Page 335 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts 4-14 Transfer Roller ETB Cleaning Blade Brush Roller F-4-8 4-14 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts...
  • Page 336 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts 4-15 Name Main Unit Service Parts No. Reference Adjustment during parts replacement [1] ETB ETB Unit FC8-7159 "Removing the ETB Unit"(page 4-137). [2] Transfer Roller ETB Unit FC8-7160...
  • Page 337 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts 4-16 Fixing Sub Thermistor 1(THM2) Fixing Sub Thermistor 2(THM3) Fixing Main Thermistor(THM1) Fixing Roller Fixing Roller Fixing Roller Insulating Bush Thrust Retainer Fixing Roller Thrust Retainer Fixing Roller...
  • Page 338 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts 4-17 Name Main Unit Service Parts No. Reference Adjustment during parts raplacement [1] Fixing Sub Thermister 1(THM2) Fixing Assembly FK2-7693 "Removing the Sub Thermistor1"(page 4-192).
  • Page 339 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts 4-18 Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Right Deck Pickup Roller Right Deck Separation Roller Right Deck Feed Roller Left Deck Separation Roller Dustproof Filter Cassette 3 Separation Roller...
  • Page 340 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts 4-19 Name Main Unit Service Parts No. Reference Adjustment during parts replacement [1] Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller Multi-purpose Pickup Unit FB1-8581 "Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller"(page 4-205).

  • Page 341: List Of Cleaning Parts

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-20 ■ List of Cleaning Parts Lower side of Developing Assembly Developing Roller Lower side of Developing Cylinder Developing Roller Pre-exposure Scraper Drum Edge Cleaning Unit Plate Drum...
  • Page 342 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-21 Name Main Unit Reference [1] Cleaning Unit Plate Drum Cleaning Unit "Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit"(page 4-119). [2] Pre-exposure Scraper Drum Cleaning Unit "Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit"(page 4-119).
  • Page 343 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-22 Primary Charging Assembly Shield Plate (R) Primary Charging Assembly Shield Plate (L) Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shield Plate Toner Receptacle Tray Waste Toner Container...
  • Page 344 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-23 Name Main Unit Reference [1] Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire Primary Charging Assembly "Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire"(page 4-107). [2] Primary Charging Assembly Shield Plate Primary Charging Assembly "Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire"(page 4-107).
  • Page 345 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-24 Fixing inlet guide Fixing cleaning web guide Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag Fixing Assembly Inner Delivery Roller Fixing oil pan Upper separation claw Fixing Right Stay Dowel Holder Dowel...
  • Page 346 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-25 Name Main Unit Reference [1] Fixing Inlet Guide Fixing Assembly "Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder"(page 4-178). [2] Fixing Right Stay Fixing Assembly "Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder"(page 4-178).
  • Page 347 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-26 Registration Unit Feed Guide Right Door Unit Feed Guide Right Lower Door Unit Feed Guide Inner Feed Guide Reverse Delivery Unit Feed Guide Fixing Feed Unit (Duplex/Rear) Feed Guide F-4-14...
  • Page 348 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-27 Name Main Unit Reference [1] Registration Unit Feed Guide Registration Unit "Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-207). [2] Reverse Delivery Unit Feed Guide Reverse Delivery Unit "Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-207).
  • Page 349 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-28 Separation Static Eliminator Roller of Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit Roller of Right Door Unit Registration Unit Magnet Roller of Right Lower Door Unit Duplex area Cleaning Brush Roller of Reverse Delivery Unit...
  • Page 350 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-29 Name Main Unit Reference [1] Roller of Fixing Feed Unit Fixing Feed Unit "Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-207). [2] Registration Unit Magnet Registration Unit "Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-207).
  • Page 351 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-30 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit Pickup Feed Drive Unit PS28 PS24 PS29 PS64 PS67 PS66 PS65 Right Door Unit Fixing Feed Unit F-4-16 4-30 Parts Replacement and Clearning >...
  • Page 352 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-31 Name Main Unit Reference PS24 Vertical Path Sensor 1 Vertical Path Unit "Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-207). PS28 Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper Sensor Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit "Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-207).
  • Page 353 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-32 Dust-Proof Glass Laser Scanner Unit F-4-17 4-32 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts...
  • Page 354 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-33 Name Main Unit Reference [1] Dustproof Glass Main Body "Cleaning the Dust Collecting Glass"(page 4-96). T-4-17 4-33 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts...

  • Page 355: List Of Fan

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Fan 4-34 List of Fan FM17 FM16 FM33 FM31 FM30 FM32 IH power supply unit FM41 Power Supply FM42 FM40 FM14 FM15 F-4-18 4-34 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Fan...
  • Page 356 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Fan 4-35 Name Main Unit Service Parts No. Adjustment during parts replacement Reference Primary Charging Assembly Air Supply Fan Product configuration FK2-7678 Making Image Exhaust Fan Product configuration FL3-3866 Main Controller Cooling Fan Product configuration FK2-8276...

  • Page 357: List Of Clutch / Solenoid

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid 4-36 List of Clutch / Solenoid Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit Fixing Feed Unit SL11 Fixing Assembly F-4-19 4-36 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid...
  • Page 358 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid 4-37 Name Main Unit Service Parts No. Adjustment during parts replacement Reference SL2 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid Multi-purpose Pickup Unit FK2-0115 SL5 Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid Fixing Feed Unit FM4-5141 SL9 Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid...
  • Page 359 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid 4-38 F-4-20 4-38 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid...
  • Page 360 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid 4-39 Name Main Unit Service Parts No. Adjustment during parts replacement Reference CL1 Developing Clutch Developing Assembly FK2-7684 SL3 Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid Cassette 3 Pickup Unit FL3-4906 SL4 Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid Cassette 4 Pickup Unit...

  • Page 361: List Of Motor

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor 4-40 List of Motor Buffer Assembly Hopper Unit Process Unit ETB Unit Fixing Assembly F-4-21 4-40 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor...
  • Page 362 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor 4-41 Name Main Unit Service Parts No. Adjustment during parts replacement Reference M3 Fixing Motor Fixing Assembly FK2-7669 M6 Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor Process Unit FL2-0991 M7 Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor Process Unit FL2-0991 M10 Toner Supply Motor...
  • Page 363 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor 4-42 Laser Scanner Unit Fixing Feed Unit Outer Delivery Unit F-4-22 4-42 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor...
  • Page 364 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor 4-43 Name Main Unit Service Parts No. Adjustment during parts replacement Reference M13 Delivery Motor Outer Delivery Unit FK2-7675 M14 Reverse Motor Fixing Feed Unit FK2-7675 M16 Side Registration Motor Fixing Feed Unit FK2-2069 M18 Duplex Feed Right Motor...
  • Page 365 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor 4-44 Developing Drive Unit Pickup Feed Unit Drum Drive Unit Cassette Pickup Drive Unit F-4-23 4-44 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor...
  • Page 366 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor 4-45 Name Main Unit Service Parts No. Adjustment during parts replacement Reference M1 Drum Motor Drum Drive Unit FK2-7671 M2 Developing Motor Developing Assembly Drive Unit FK2-7667 M4 Right Deck Lifter Motor Cassette Pickup Drive Unit FM2-4663 M5 Left Deck Lifter Motor...

  • Page 367: List Of Sensor

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor 4-46 List of Sensor Developing Assembly Pickup Feed Drive Unit PS29 PS24 Drum Drive Unit PS51 PS61 PS45 PS52 Right Door Unit PS53 PS96 Fixing Assembly F-4-24 4-46 Parts Replacement and Clearning >...
  • Page 368 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor 4-47 Name Main Unit Service Parts No. Adjustment during parts replacement Reference PS4 Fixing Toenail Jam Sensor Fixing Assembly WG8-5848 PS24 Vertical Path Sensor 1 Vertical Path Unit FK2-6470 PS29 Registration Sensor Pickup Feed Drive Unit...
  • Page 369 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor 4-48 Upper High Voltage Unit Hopper Unit Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit Buffer Assembly PS54 UN13 PS23 PS28 PS56 PS64 PS55 PS67 PS35 PS66 PS25 PS36 PS65 PS31 Outer Delivery Unit Fixing Feed Unit Vertical Path Unit F-4-25...
  • Page 370 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor 4-49 Name Main Unit Service Parts No. Adjustment during parts replacement Reference Vertical Path Cover Open/Close Sensor Vertical Path Unit WG8-5848 PS23 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor Multi-purpose Pickup Unit WG8-5848 PS25 Vertical Path Sensor 2 Vertical Path Unit...
  • Page 371 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor 4-50 Cassette1 Pickup Unit PS19 PS32 Cassette1 Pickup Unit Cassette2 Pickup Unit Cassette3 Pickup Unit PS94 PS10 Cassette2 Pickup Unit PS12 PS33 PS95 PS68 PS17 PS20 PS47 PS21 PS26 PS11 PS48...
  • Page 372 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor 4-51 Name Main Unit Service Parts No. Adjustment during parts replacement Reference PS3 Multi-purpose Tray Cover Open/Close Sensor Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit WG8-5848 PS6 Right Deck Paper Height Sensor Right Deck Unit WG8-5848 PS7 Right Deck Paper Sensor...

  • Page 373: List Of Switch

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Switch 4-52 List of Switch Waste Toner Unit Power Supply Unit SW10 F-4-27 4-52 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Switch...
  • Page 374 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Switch 4-53 Name Main Unit Service Parts No. Adjustment during parts replacement Reference SW1 Power Switch Product configuration WC2-5688 SW2 Front Door Open Detection Switch Product configuration WC4-5125 SW3 Environment Switch Product configuration WC1-5179 SW4 Cassette Heater Switch...

  • Page 375: List Of Pcb

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of PCB 4-54 List of PCB PCB50 Fixing Feed Unit PCB51 PCB13 PCB52 Controller Unit PCB9 PCB4 PCB2 PCB34 PCB1 PCB25 PCB29 PCB3 PCB6(100V) PCB5 PCB7(200V) PCB8 PCB33 PCB17(100V) PCB18(200V) Power Supply Unit PCB30 PCB31...
  • Page 376 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of PCB 4-55 Name Main Unit Service Parts No. Adjustment during parts replacement Reference PCB1 DC Controller PCB Product configuration FM4-1104 "DC Controller PCB"(page 5-12). PCB2 Main Driver PCB Product configuration FM4-1083 PCB3 Feed Driver PCB Product configuration...
  • Page 377 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of PCB 4-56 Upper High Voltage Unit Laser Scanner Unit PCB32 PCB12 PCB35 PCB26 PCB11 PCB10 PCB36 PCB15 PCB54 PCB24 PCB23 PCB19 PCB20 Process Unit PCB27(200V) Process Unit PCB28(100V) F-4-29 4-56 Parts Replacement and Clearning >...
  • Page 378 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of PCB 4-57 Name Main Unit Service Parts No. Adjustment during parts replacement Refernce PCB10 Fixing power Supply PCB (100V, 120V) Product configuration FM2-3648 PCB10 Fixing power Supply PCB (230V) Product configuration FM4-1099 PCB11 Primary Charging High Voltage PCB...

  • Page 379: Heater,Others

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Heater,others 4-58 Heater,others UN75 EPC1 Process Unit THM2 THM3 THM1 Power Supply Unit Fixing Assembly CB1001 CB1002 CB1003 CB1004 F-4-30 4-58 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Heater,others...
  • Page 380 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Heater,others 4-59 Name Main Unit Service Parts No. Adjustment during parts replacement Reference Drum Heater Process Unit FK2-7723(JP) FK2-7724(US) FK2-7725(EUR) Pre-exposure LED Process Unit FM3-7292 Multi Cassette Heater Product configuration FM3-8915 Fixing Heater Fixing Assembly FM3-7359...

  • Page 381: Connector List

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-60 Connector List F-4-31 4-60 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List...
  • Page 382 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-61 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name REMARKS J401 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J518 PCB5 Relay PCB J411 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J126 PCB2 Main Driver PCB...
  • Page 383 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-62 F-4-32 4-62 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List...
  • Page 384 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-63 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name REMARKS J101 PCB2 Main Driver PCB J515 PCB5 Relay PCB J102 PCB2 Main Driver PCB J2009 Delivery Motor J103...
  • Page 385 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-64 F-4-33 4-64 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List...
  • Page 386 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-65 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name REMARKS J111 PCB2 Main Driver PCB J3097 J3501 PCB11 Primary Charging High Voltage PCB J112 PCB2 Main Driver PCB...
  • Page 387 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-66 F-4-34 4-66 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List...
  • Page 388 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-67 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name REMARKS J201 PCB3 Feed Driver PCB J516 PCB5 Relay PCB J211 PCB3 Feed Driver PCB J2050 Left Deck Pickup Motor J211...
  • Page 389 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-68 F-4-35 4-68 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List...
  • Page 390 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-69 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name REMARKS J223 PCB3 Feed Driver PCB J3128 J2054 PS25 Vertical Path Sensor2 J223 PCB3 Feed Driver PCB J3635 J2055...
  • Page 391 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-70 F-4-36 4-70 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List...
  • Page 392 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-71 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name REMARKS J310 PCB4 Duplex Driver PCB J3233 J3002 J517 PCB5 Relay PCB J311 PCB4 Duplex Driver PCB J100 PCB9...
  • Page 393 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-72 F-4-37 4-72 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List...
  • Page 394 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-73 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name REMARKS J501 PCB5 Relay PCB PCB51 Main Controller PCB 2 J502 PCB5 Relay PCB J3237 J9040 DECK LATTICE...
  • Page 395 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-74 F-4-38 4-74 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List...
  • Page 396 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-75 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name REMARKS J601 PCB6,7 AC Driver PCB PCB25 Choke Coil PCB J602 PCB6,7 AC Driver PCB J802 PCB17,18 Noise Filter...
  • Page 397 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-76 F-4-39 4-76 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List...
  • Page 398 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-77 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name REMARKS J801 PCB17,18 Noise Filter CB1001 Leakage Breaker J801 PCB17,18 Noise Filter CB1002 Leakage Breaker J801 PCB17,18 Noise Filter...
  • Page 399 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-78 F-4-40 4-78 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List...
  • Page 400 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-79 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name REMARKS J1000 PCB50 Main Controller PCB 1 DDR2-SDRAM J1002 PCB50 Main Controller PCB 1 Voice Guidance Kit-F1/F2 J1003 PCB50 Main Controller PCB 1...
  • Page 401 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-80 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name REMARKS Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AF1 Super G3 2nd Line Fax Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AF1 Board-AF1 Super G3 2nd Line Fax Modular PCB (2 to 4 lines)

  • Page 402: Main Controller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 1 4-81 Main Controller <Procedure> 1) Disconnect the Connector (USB Cable and the Control Panel Cable) to remove the Main Controller PCB 1 Unit in the direction of the arrow. Removing Main Controller PCB 1 <Preparation>...
  • Page 403 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 1 4-82 <Actions after Parts Replacement> 2) Install the Main Controller PCB 1 Unit. 1. Install the following parts removed from the old PCB to the new PCB. •...
  • Page 404 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 1 4-83 3) Place a metallic ruler vertically on the gap between the connectors of the PCBs, and check 4) Observe the gap between the connectors of the PCBs from the front, and visually check that the gap is not large enough for the edge of the metallic ruler to be fitted in.
  • Page 405 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 1 4-84 3. Adjusting the positions of the PCBs 4) Remove the Controller Box Inner Cover. 1) Remove the Main Controller PCB 1 Unit. • 4 Screws 2) Open the Controller Box in the direction of the arrow. F-4-51 5) Loosen the 8 screws securing the DC Controller PCB.
  • Page 406 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 1 4-85 6) Install the Main Controller PCB 1 Unit. 8) Fully tighten the loosened screws to secure the Main Controller PCB 2, Channel Link PCB, • 3 Connectors and DC Controller PCB in that order.

  • Page 407: Removing Main Controller Pcb 2

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2 4-86 Removing Main Controller PCB 2 <Processing when replacing the parts> 1) Replace the part from the old PCB to the new PCB. <Processing before replacing the parts> •...
  • Page 408 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2 4-87 <Preparation> 4. Remove the Box Left Inner Cover. 1. Remove the Box Cover (Right). (Refer to "Removing Main Controller PCB 1") 4-1) Disconnect the Connectors. 2. Remove the Main Controller PCB 1. (Refer to page 4-81) •...
  • Page 409 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2 4-88 4-3) Remove the Box Left Inner Cover. 2) Remove the Channel Link PCB in the direction of the arrow. • 2 Screws • 4 Screws • 1 Connector F-4-62 3) Remove the Main Controller PCB 2.
  • Page 410 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2 4-89 <Actions after Parts Replacement> 2) Install the Main Controller PCB 1 Unit. 1. Checking connection of the Main Controller PCB 2 • 3 Connectors CAUTION: If the Main Controller PCB 1 cannot be inserted in the slot (or cannot be inserted properly) or Error occurs after starting the machine, follow the following steps to check the connection between the Main Controller PCB 1 and the Main Controller PCB 2.
  • Page 411 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2 4-90 3) Place a metallic ruler vertically on the gap between the connectors of the PCBs, and check 4) Observe the gap between the connectors of the PCBs from the front, and visually check that the gap is not large enough for the edge of the metallic ruler to be fitted in.
  • Page 412 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2 4-91 2. Adjusting the positions of the PCBs 4) Remove the Controller Box Inner Cover. 1) Remove the Main Controller PCB 1 Unit. • 4 Screws 2) Open the Controller Box in the direction of the arrow. F-4-70 5) Loosen the 8 screws securing the DC Controller PCB.
  • Page 413 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2 4-92 6) Install the Main Controller PCB 1 Unit. 8) Fully tighten the loosened screws to secure the Main Controller PCB 2, Channel Link PCB, • 3 Connectors and DC Controller PCB in that order.

  • Page 414: Laser Exposure System

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit 4-93 Laser Exposure System 2. Removing the Right Cover. NOTE: Removing the Laser Scanner Unit Laser Scanner Unit can be removed without removing the Right Cover. Howerver, removing the Right Cover is recommended here for better operability.
  • Page 415 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit 4-94 2-4) Remove the E-ring to remove the Door Link. CAUTION: To prevent falling of Right Cover, hold the Right Cover to remove the Hinge Pins. <Procedure>...
  • Page 416 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit 4-95 3) Free the Harness from the Harness Guide and Disconnect the Connector. 5) Hook the wire of the Laser Scanner Unit to the hook of the main body. F-4-83 F-4-81 4) Pull out the Laser Scanner Unit halfway.

  • Page 417: Cleaning The Dust Collecting Glass

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Laser Exposure System > Cleaning the Dust Collecting Glass 4-96 Cleaning the Dust Collecting Glass 7) Remove the Laser Scanner Unit. <Preparation> CAUTION: 1) Open the Front Cover. Before removing the Laser Scanner Unit, check that the hooking wire of the unit is not 2) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly.

  • Page 418: Image Formation System

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Assembly 4-97 Image Formation System 1) While pushing the Release Lever in the direction of the arrow, pull out the Primary Charging Assembly. Removing the Primary Charging Assembly CAUTION: When removing the Primary Charging Assembly, be careful not to hold the PCB of the <Preparation>...

  • Page 419: Removing The Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left)

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left) 4-98 Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner <Processing after replacing the parts> 1) Clear the parts counter for the Primary Charging Assembly. Holder (Right/Left) 2) Output halftone image in service mode.
  • Page 420 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left) 4-99 <Procedure> 1) Remove the Shield Plate (Right). When removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder (Left), remove the Shield Plate (Left). CAUTION: •...
  • Page 421 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left) 4-100 4) Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner (Right) in the direction of the arrow. CAUTION:Points to Caution when Installing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder Be sure to push in the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder until it is secured with the CAUTION: Claw.

  • Page 422: Replacing The Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire 4-101 Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire 3) Loosen the 4 screws fixing the Motor Unit in the front. Screws <Preparation> 1. Open the Front Cover. 2.
  • Page 423 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire 4-102 6) Untie approx. 5cm of the Charging Wire from the 0.1mm (wire-diameter) Charging Wire 9) After setting the wire 35 times around, pass through B part. After turning over the Primary Reel to make a 2mm-diameter ring at the edge.
  • Page 424 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire 4-103 10) Cut the extra length of the Charging Wire with nippers. 13) Remove the Shield Plate (Left) and pinch the Grid Wire from the left side to clean it on the 11) Loosen the 4 screws and tighten the screw until the tension of the Grid Wire is uniformed.

  • Page 425: Replacing The Primary Charging Wire

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire 4-104 Replacing the Primary Charging Wire CAUTION: Be sure to move the Primary Charging Wire Cleaners (Left and Right) until they stop and tighten the screws. NOTE: Replacement procedure is the same between the Primary Charging Wire (Left) and the Primary Charging Wire (Right).
  • Page 426 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire 4-105 <Procedure> 3) Remove the Charging Wire from the protrusion and the groove of the Positioning Block at <Removing the Charging Wire> the front side. 1) Remove the Sheet. Protrusion Groove Charging...
  • Page 427 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire 4-106 5) Cut the edge of the twisted Charging Wire with nippers. 9) Hook the Charging Wire to the rear groove of the Charging Wire Positioning Block and 6) Hook the ring to the front protrusion of the Positioning Block to hook the Charging Wire to hold the edge of the Charging Wire Tension Spring with tweezers to hook it to the charging the groove.

  • Page 428: Cleaning The Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire 4-107 Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire 3) Remove the Shield Plate (Left) and pinch the Grid Wire from the left side to clean it on the left side with lint-free paper moistened with water.

  • Page 429: Removing The Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly 4-108 Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly 1) Turn the Lock Lever in the direction of the arrow to pull out the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. <Preparation> 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly") CAUTION: When removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly, be careful not to hold the PCB of <Procedure>...

  • Page 430: Removing The Pre-Transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder 4-109 Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, CAUTION:Points to Caution at Installation Cleaner Holder Be sure to fit the Transfer Charging Assembly to the groove on the host machine and install it horizontally.
  • Page 431 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder 4-110 2) Turn the Gear by hand to move the Cleaning Pad Arm to the front. CAUTION:Points to Caution when Securing the Shield Plate Move the Shield Plate Retainer Block fully to the inside to secure with the screw.
  • Page 432 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder 4-111 3) Pinch the Hook and turn it in the direction of the arrow to remove the Pre-transfer Charging CAUTION:Points to Caution at Installation Assembly Cleaner Holder.

  • Page 433: Replacing The Pre-Transfer Charging Wire

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire 4-112 Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire 1) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Covers (Front and Rear). NOTE: The Primary Charging Wire with spring is set as a service part. <Preparation>...
  • Page 434 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire 4-113 5) Hook the ring to the rear charging electrode of the Pre-charging Assembly and put the ring 8) Hold the tip of the Spring with tweezers and hook the Charging Wire to the groove to hook through the rear groove and the sponge groove.

  • Page 435: Cleaning The Pre-Transfer Charging Wire

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Process Unit 4-114 Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Removing the Process Unit <Preparation> <Preparation> 1. Open the Front Cover. 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly") 2.
  • Page 436 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Process Unit 4-115 CAUTION:Points to Caution at Installation CAUTION:Points to Caution at Installation When installing the Process Unit, fit the 3 grooves at the edge of the Drum Shaft with Be sure to fit the Drum Cleaning Unit to the rail on the host machine and install it the 3 protrusions of the Drum Fixation Cylinder to install the Drum Shaft Fixing Screw.

  • Page 437: Cleaning The Process Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Process Unit 4-116 Cleaning the Process Unit 2) Clean the rear side of the Process Unit with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. <Preparation> 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to “Removing the Primary Charging Assembly”) 2.

  • Page 438: Removing The Drum Cleaning Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit 4-117 Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit CAUTION: <Preparation> When installing the Drum Cleaning Unit, clean the area shown with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly") 2.

  • Page 439: Removing The Drum Cleaning Blade

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade 4-118 Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade 2) Remove the Drum Cleaning Blade. • 5 Screws (to loosen) <Preparation> 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly") 2.

  • Page 440: Cleaning The Drum Cleaning Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit 4-119 Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit CAUTION:Points to Caution when Installing the Drum Cleaning Blade Unit 1. Wipe out the toner on both edges of the Drum Cleaning Unit before installation. <Preparation>...
  • Page 441 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit 4-120 2) Clean the 2 Pre-exposure Plastic Films of the Drum Cleaning Blade Unit with lint-free 3) Crumb toner clusters in the toner collection area and then clean it. paper.

  • Page 442: Replacing The Pre-Exposure Plastic Film

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit 4-121 Replacing the Pre-exposure Plastic Film Removing the Drum Unit <Preparation> <Preparation> 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to “Removing the Primary Charging Assembly”) 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly") 2.

  • Page 443: Removing The Photosensitive Drum

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Photosensitive Drum 4-122 Removing the Photosensitive Drum 1) Remove the Drum Retainer Plate (tentative name). • 3 Screws <Preparation> 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to “Removing the Primary Charging Assembly”) 2.
  • Page 444 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Photosensitive Drum 4-123 1) Wrap paper around the Drum Unit to block light. 3) Disconnect the connector and remove the Drum Heater. Drum Heater F-4-151 F-4-153 2) Remove the 2 screws and the Flange. F-4-152 4-123 Parts Replacement and Clearning >...
  • Page 445 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Photosensitive Drum 4-124 4) Remove the Heater Control PCB Unit. CAUTION: • Align the yellow marker of the drum with the hole position of the unit when installing the Heater Control PCB Unit to the drum. F-4-154 NOTE: Serial ID of the drum is written on the seal inside the drum.
  • Page 446 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Photosensitive Drum 4-125 3) Affix the ID Label included in the drum to the inside of the Front Cover. NOTE: If the yellow marker is not aligned with the protrusion, the following control cannot be executed properly.

  • Page 447: Cleaning Photosensitive Drum

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning Photosensitive Drum 4-126 Cleaning Photosensitive Drum 4) Rotate the drum for the width (5 to 10 cm), and repeat the step 3 through 5 until the entire area of the surface has been cleaned. 1) Moisten lint-free paper with 5 to 10 cc of alcohol solutions ;...

  • Page 448: Cleaning The Drum Edges

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Cleaner Separation Claw 4-127 Cleaning the Drum edges Removing the Cleaner Separation Claw <Preparation> <Preparation> 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to “Removing the Primary Charging Assembly”) 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly") 2.

  • Page 449: Removing The Side Seal

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Side Seal 4-128 Removing the Side Seal 2) Apply Tospearl on the surfaces of the new Drum Side Seals (Front and Rear) and adhere it uniformly with lint-free paper. <Preparation>...

  • Page 450: Removing The Developing Assembly

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly 4-129 Removing the Developing Assembly CAUTION:How to Hold the Developing Assembly When holding the Developing Assembly, be sure to hold the handle of the Developing 1) Place paper underneath the Developing Assembly. Assembly as shown in the figure.
  • Page 451 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly 4-130 CAUTION:Points to Caution when Installing the Developing Assembly • As shown in the figure, hold the Developing Assembly and fit the protrusions at right and left sides of the Developing Assembly to the rail of the host machine. Before installing the Developing Assembly, check that the Buffer Shutter is not open.

  • Page 452: Cleaning The Developing Assembly

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Developing Assembly 4-131 Cleaning the Developing Assembly • Install the Developing Assembly horizontally by following the rail. <Preparation> 1. Remove the Developing Assembly. (Refer to page 4-129) <Procedure> 1) Clean the 2 Developing Rollers with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating them.

  • Page 453: Removing The Developing Cylinder And The Developing Roller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller 4-132 Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing 3) Remove toner in the main body. Roller <Preparation> 1. Remove the Developing Assembly. (Refer to page 4-129) 2.
  • Page 454 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller 4-133 2-3) Remove the Developing Assembly Front Cover. Points to Caution at Installation: • 3 Screws Since white lines may occur on the image, go through the following steps to match the phase of the Sleeve Bias Plate and Developing Cylinder Blade.
  • Page 455 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller 4-134 Points to Caution at Installation: Points to Caution at Installation: Check that the long hole of the Sleeve Bias Plate is fitted with the hole of Find the position in which either scale of Sleeve Bias Plate is most matched with one the Developing Cylinder Blade.
  • Page 456 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller 4-135 2-5) Lift the left side to remove the Developing Cylinder Blade in the direction of the arrow. O Ring Developing • 2 Bosses Roller Spacer C Ring...
  • Page 457 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller 4-136 3) Remove the Bearing to remove the Developing Cylinder. CAUTION: How to Install the C Ring When installing the C Rings removed in step 2 and 3, be sure to perform the following to fit the C Rings into the groove of the Developing Cylinder securely.

  • Page 458: Removing The Etb Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Unit 4-137 Removing the ETB Unit 1-3) Push to release the Release Springs at both sides of the Rail, and then further pull out the Fixing Feed Unit until it stops. <Preparation>...
  • Page 459 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Unit 4-138 <Procedure> 2) Hold the 2 Handles to remove the ETB Unit in the direction of the arrow. 1) Remove the Fixing Feed Right Front Upper Cover. •...

  • Page 460: Removing The Etb

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB 4-139 Removing the ETB 2) Set up the ETB Unit to remove the Roller Unit from the ETB. <Preparation> 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the ETB Unit") 2.

  • Page 461: Cleaning The Etb

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the ETB 4-140 Cleaning the ETB <Processing when replacing the parts> 1) Clear the ETB control counter. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>TR-BLT) <Preparation> Parts counter (COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1>TR-BLT) is also cleared coincidentally. 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to “Removing the ETB”) 2.

  • Page 462: Removing The Transfer Roller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Transfer Roller 4-141 Removing the Transfer Roller 2) Remove the Transfer Roller Shaft Support from the Transfer Roller. <Preparation> 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the ETB Unit") 2.

  • Page 463: Removing The Etb Cleaning Blade

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Brush Roller 4-142 Removing the ETB Cleaning Blade Removing the ETB Brush Roller <Preparation> <Preparation> 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the ETB Unit") 1.
  • Page 464 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Brush Roller 4-143 2) Remove the Connection Gear and the N-ring from the ETB Brush Roller. CAUTION: • Be sure to keep in contact with the Grounding Plate when installing the Post-transfer Guide.
  • Page 465 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Brush Roller 4-144 4) Remove the Shaft Support from the ETB Brush Roller. • 1 N-ring Shaft Support ETB Brush Roller Shaft Support F-4-205 4-144 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Brush Roller...

  • Page 466: Removing The Waste Toner Container

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Container 4-145 Removing the Waste Toner Container <Processing when replacing the parts> 1) Set a new Waste Toner Container. 1) Remove the Right Rear Lower Cover. 2) Clear the waste toner counter.(COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>WST-TNR) •...

  • Page 467: Removing The Drum Heater

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Heater 4-146 Removing the Drum Heater 1) Wrap paper around the Drum Unit to block light. <Preparation> 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly") 2.

  • Page 468: Removing The Primary Charging Shutter Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit 4-147 Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit 3) Disconnect the connector and remove the Drum Heater. <Preparation> Drum Heater 1. Open the Front Cover. 2. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly") 3.
  • Page 469 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit 4-148 2) Move down the Primary Charging Assembly to remove the Shield Plate (Right). 4) Install the Shield Plate (Right). • 2 Screws • 2 Screws 5) Remove the Shield Plate (Left).
  • Page 470 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit 4-149 7) Install the Shield Plate (Left). <Installation Method> • 2 Screws CAUTION:Points to Caution at Installation Be careful not to get the Leaf Spring caught by the Charging Wire to install it to the CAUTION: Cleaner Claw.

  • Page 471: Removing The Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit 4-150 Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter CAUTION: Unit Be careful not to remove the screw and the Screw Gear when removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit.
  • Page 472 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit 4-151 <Installation Method> CAUTION: 1) Install the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit. When installing the Motor Unit, fit the PCB into the slot. • 3 Screws F-4-224 F-4-222 2) Pull the Shutter with your fingers to hook it to the Cleaner Unit.

  • Page 473: Removing The Drum Brush Roller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Brush Roller 4-152 Removing the Drum Brush Roller CAUTION:Points to Caution when Securing the Shield Plate Be sure to check that the rear pin is fit into the frame hole. CAUTION: 4) Move the Shield Plate Retainer Block fully to the inside to secure with the screw.

  • Page 474: Removing The Etb Drive Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Drive Unit 4-153 Removing the ETB Drive Unit 2) Remove the 2 Gears and the 2 Bearings. • 3 E-rings <Preparation> 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the ETB Unit") 2.
  • Page 475 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Drive Unit 4-154 2) Remove the Fixing Feed Right Front Cover. 3) Remove the Fixing Feed Left Cover. • 2 Screws • 3 Screws • 1 Claw F-4-233 F-4-231 CAUTION: CAUTION:...
  • Page 476 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Drive Unit 4-155 4) Remove the Duct. 5) Remove the ETB Drive Unit. • 2 Screws • 3 Screws • 1 Connector • 1 Connector • Harness F-4-236 F-4-235 CAUTION: When installing, turn the gear so that the gear is engaged.

  • Page 477: Removing The Transfer Cleaning Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Post-transfer Static Eliminator 4-156 Removing the Transfer Cleaning Unit Removing the Post-transfer Static Eliminator <Preparation> <Preparation> 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the ETB Unit") 1.
  • Page 478 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Post-transfer Static Eliminator 4-157 2) Remove the Post-transfer Guide. 3) Remove the Separation Guide Reinforcing Plate. • 2 Protrusions • 3 Screws • 2 Springs F-4-242 4) Remove the Post-transfer Static Eliminator. F-4-241 CAUTION: Be careful not to lose the springs when removing the Post-transfer Guide.

  • Page 479: Removing The Toner Receptacle Tray

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Receptacle Tray 4-158 Removing the Toner Receptacle Tray CAUTION: <Preparation> 1. Be sure to fit the protrusion into the groove of the plate to install. 1. Open the Front Upper Cover. 2.

  • Page 480: Removing The Hopper Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit 4-159 Removing the Hopper Unit CAUTION: 1) Open the Front Cover. When starting the host machine, be sure to set the Shutter from CLOSE to OPEN. 2) Open the Inner Cover (Primary Charging Air Supply Fan Unit). 5) Remove the Front Upper Cover.
  • Page 481 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit 4-160 7) Remove the Toner Receptacle Tray. 8) Remove the Connecting Drive Unit. • 1 Screw • 1 Screw • 1 Protrusion F-4-253 9) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. F-4-251 CAUTION: CAUTION:...
  • Page 482 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit 4-161 10) Remove the Left Upper Cover 2. 13) Set the Lock Lever back. • 1 Screw • 1 Protrusion F-4-257 14) Remove the Hopper Unit. • 4 Screws F-4-255 •...
  • Page 483 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit 4-162 16) Remove the Bottle Cam. CAUTION: • 1 E-ring When installing the Hopper Unit, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to •...

  • Page 484: Removing The Buffer Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Buffer Unit 4-163 Removing the Buffer Unit 4) Move the lever in the direction of the arrow to close the Shutter. <Preparation> 1. Open the Right Cover. 2. Remove the Developing Assembly. (Refer to page 4-129) <Procedure>...
  • Page 485 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Buffer Unit 4-164 6) Release the Lock Lever to remove the Toner Bottle. NOTE: Clean the Toner Receptacle Tray with lint-free paper. F-4-266 7) Remove the Toner Receptacle Tray. F-4-268 •...
  • Page 486 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Buffer Unit 4-165 9) Disconnect the connector of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. CAUTION:Points to Caution When Installing the Buffer Unit • Be sure to securely set the Buffer Unit on the Rail. •...

  • Page 487: Removing The Potential Control Pcb Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit 4-166 Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit <Procedure> 1) Remove the Right Door Link Unit from the pin. <Preparation> • 1 E-ring 1. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly Unit. 2.
  • Page 488 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit 4-167 3) Remove the Potential Control Tray. 5) Remove the harness. • 3 Screws • 1 Connector • 2 Connectors • Edge Saddle • Wire Saddle •...

  • Page 489: Removing The Waste Toner Feed Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit 4-168 Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit 2. Open the Controller Box. 2-1) Disconnect the Reader Communication Cable. <Preparation> 1. Remove the Box Cover (Left). 1-1) Remove the Harness.
  • Page 490 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit 4-169 3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover. <Procedure> 3-1) Remove the Rear Lower Cover in the direction of the arrow. 1) Open the Motor Driver Support Plate. •...
  • Page 491 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit 4-170 3) Loosen the screw and move the Belt Tensioner in the direction of the arrow, and then again 5) Remove the Duct. tighten the screw. •...

  • Page 492: Removing The Drum Drive Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit 4-171 Removing the Drum Drive Unit 7) Remove the Waste Toner Feed Unit. • 2 Connectors <Preparation> • 4 Screws 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly") 2.
  • Page 493 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit 4-172 2) Loosen the screw and move the Belt Tensioner in the direction of the arrow, and then again 4) Remove the transformer. tighten the screw. •...

  • Page 494: Removing The Developing Drive Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Drive Unit 4-173 Removing the Developing Drive Unit 6) Remove the Duct Unit. • 3 Screws <Preparation> • 1 Connector 1. Remove the Developing Assembly. (Refer to page 4-129) •...
  • Page 495 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Drive Unit 4-174 2) Loosen the screw and move the Belt Tensioner in the direction of the arrow, and then again 4) Remove the transformer. tighten the screw. •...
  • Page 496 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Drive Unit 4-175 6) Remove the Duct Unit. 8) Remove the Developing Drive Unit. • 3 Screws • 3 Connectors • 1 Connector • 1 Reuse Band • Harness •...

  • Page 497: Fixing

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Assembly 4-176 Fixing 1-3) Push to release the Release Springs at both sides of the Rail, and then further pull out the Fixing Feed Unit until it stops. Removing the Fixing Assembly <Preparation>...
  • Page 498 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Assembly 4-177 <Procedure> CAUTION: Points to Caution at Installation 1) Hold the Lever of the Feed Unit to open the Feed Unit. • Be careful not to damage the Inner Delivery Sensor Flag. 2) Remove the Fixing Assembly.

  • Page 499: Cleaning The Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder 4-178 Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor 3) Remove the Fixing Inlet Guide Unit. • 1 Connector Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder •...

  • Page 500: Cleaning The Inner Delivery Roller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Cleaning the Inner Delivery Roller 4-179 Cleaning the Inner Delivery Roller 4) Turn over the Fixing Inlet Guide Unit, and insert lint-free paper into the clearance (front side) between the Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag Shaft and the Shaft Support Plate to remove the <Preparation>...

  • Page 501: Cleaning The Fixing Oil Pan, Fixing Cleaning Web Guide

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web 4-180 Cleaning the Fixing Oil Pan, Fixing Cleaning Web Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web Guide <Preparation> 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly") <Preparation>...
  • Page 502 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web 4-181 4-2) Remove the Fixing Upper Cover. 2) Remove the Fixing Cleaning Web. • 1 Screw F-4-324 F-4-322 <Procedure> 1) Open the Fixing Cleaning Web Cover. • 2 Screws NOTE: Because it is engaged, hold the Fixing Cleaning Web Cover to remove the screws.

  • Page 503: Separating The Fixing Upper Unit From The Fixing Lower Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit 4-182 Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower CAUIOTN: Points to Caution at Installation Unit • Be sure to install the Fixing Cleaning Web in the correct direction. <Preparation>...
  • Page 504 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit 4-183 5. Secure the Shutter Drive Gear. 5-2) Rotate the Shutter Drive Gear (Rear) with fingers. Then, align the cut-off of the Shutter Gear with the hole position, and secure with the Fixing Pin removed in step 5-1. 5-1) Remove the Fixing Pin for the Shutter Drive Gear (Rear).
  • Page 505 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit 4-184 5-3) Remove the Fixing Pin for the Shutter Drive Gear (Front). 5-4) Align the cut-off of the Shutter Drive Gear (Front) with the hole position of the Plate, •...
  • Page 506 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit 4-185 <Procedure> 3) Disconnect the 5 Connectors on the other side of the Fixing Assembly. • Wire Saddle 1) Remove the Fixing Drive Unit 2. 4) Remove the Fixing Pin.

  • Page 507: Removing The Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush And Thrust Stopper

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper 4-186 Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust CAUTION: Points to Caution at Installation of the Fixing Drive Unit 2 Stopper • Be sure to fit the protrusion of the Fixing Shutter to the groove of the Fixing Shutter Drive Gear (Front) to install.
  • Page 508 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper 4-187 <Procedure> 3) Remove the Thrust Stopper from the Fixing Roller Unit to remove the Fixing Roller. Bearing 1) Place the Fixing Upper Unit as shown in the figure and remove the Fixing Roller Bearing Insulating Bush Retainer.

  • Page 509: Removing The Pressure Roller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Pressure Roller 4-188 Removing the Pressure Roller <Processing after replacing the parts> • Grease Application <Preparation> Apply approx. 20mg of grease (MOLYKOTE HP-300; CK-8012) to inner circumference and 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly") outer circumference of the Bushing so that all circumferences are covered with white film;...

  • Page 510: Removing The Pressure Roller Static Eliminator Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Pressure Roller Static Eliminator Unit 4-189 Removing the Pressure Roller Static Eliminator Unit 2) Remove the Pressure Roller Unit. <Preparation> 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly") 2.

  • Page 511: Removing The Main Thermistor, Sub Thermistor2

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Main Thermistor, Sub Thermistor2 4-190 Removing the Main Thermistor, Sub Thermistor2 2) Remove the Pressure Roller Static Eliminator. • 1 Screw <Preparation> 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly") 2.
  • Page 512 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Main Thermistor, Sub Thermistor2 4-191 2) Remove the Harness Guide and remove the Harness Band. 4) Remove the Thermistor Unit Support Plate to remove the Thermistor Reciprocating Shaft • 1 Screw from the Fixing Upper Unit.

  • Page 513: Removing The Sub Thermistor1

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Sub Thermistor1 4-192 Removing the Sub Thermistor1 CAUTION: Points to Note when Installing the Main Thermistor and the Sub Thermistor <Preparation> When the harness on the Thermistor side is short, the Sub Thermistor 2 may not 1.

  • Page 514: Removing The Upper Separation Claw

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Upper Separation Claw 4-193 Removing the Upper Separation Claw 3) Remove the Sub Thermistor Holder. • 1 Screw <Preparation> 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly") <Procedure>...

  • Page 515: Cleaning The Upper Separation Claw

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Cleaning the Upper Separation Claw 4-194 Cleaning the Upper Separation Claw 3) Wipe toner off the 4 Inner Delivery Rollers with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. <Preparation> 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly") <Procedure>...

  • Page 516: Removing The Thermoswitch

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Thermoswitch 4-195 Removing the Thermoswitch 2) Remove the Harness Guide. • 1 Screw <Preparation> 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly") 2. Remove the Fixing Assembly. (Refer to page 4-176) 3.
  • Page 517 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Thermoswitch 4-196 4) Remove the Thermoswitch Unit. • 1 Screw F-4-363 5) Remove the Retainer Plate and Thermoswitch. Leaf Spring Thermoswitch F-4-364 4-196 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Thermoswitch...

  • Page 518: Pickup/Feed System

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup Roller 4-197 Pickup/Feed System Removing the Left Deck Pickup Roller <Preparation> Removing the Left Pickup Deck 1. Open the Front Cover. 2. Remove the Left Pickup Deck. (Refer to page 4-197) 1) Open the Front Cover.

  • Page 519: Removing The Left Deck Feed Roller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Pickup Deck 4-198 Removing the Left Deck Feed Roller Removing the Right Pickup Deck <Preparation> 1) Open the Front Cover. 1. Open the Front Cover. 2) Pull out the Right Pickup Deck to remove. 2.

  • Page 520: Removing The Left Deck Separation Roller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Pickup Roller 4-199 Removing the Left Deck Separation Roller Removing the Right Deck Pickup Roller <Preparation> <Preparation> 1. Open the Front Cover. 1. Open the Front Cover. 2. Remove the Right Pickup Deck. (Refer to page 4-198) 2.

  • Page 521: Removing The Right Deck Feed Roller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Separation Roller 4-200 Removing the Right Deck Feed Roller Removing the Right Deck Separation Roller <Preparation> 1) Open the Right Upper Cover. 1. Open the Front Cover. 2) Pull out the Right Pickup Deck. 2.
  • Page 522 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Upper Cassette Pickup Roller 4-201 Removing the Upper Cassette Removing the Upper Cassette Pickup Roller 1) Pull out the Upper Cassette to remove. <Preparation> • 4 Screws 1. Remove the Upper Cassette. (Refer to page 4-201) <Procedure>...

  • Page 523: Removing The Upper Cassette

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Upper Cassette Separation Roller 4-202 Removing the Upper Cassette Feed Roller Removing the Upper Cassette Separation Roller <Preparation> 1) Open the Right Lower Cover. 1. Remove the Upper Cassette. (Refer to page 4-201) 2) Remove the Upper Cassette.

  • Page 524: Removing The Lower Cassette

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Lower Cassette Pickup Roller 4-203 Removing the Lower Cassette Pickup Roller Removing the Lower Cassette <Preparation> 1. Remove the Lower Cassette. (Refer to page 4-203) 1) Pull out the Lower Cassette to remove. •...

  • Page 525: Removing The Lower Cassette Feed Roller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Lower Cassette Separation Roller 4-204 Removing the Lower Cassette Feed Roller Removing the Lower Cassette Separation Roller <Preparation> 1) Open the Right Lower Cover. 1. Remove the Lower Cassette. (Refer to page 4-203) 2) Remove the Lower Cassette.

  • Page 526: Removing The Multi-Purpose Tray Feed Roller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller 4-205 2) Remove the bushing. • 1 E-ring Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller <Preparation> 1. Open the Inner Cover. 1-1) Open the Front Cover. 1-2) Open the Inner Cover. •...

  • Page 527: Removing The Multi-Purpose Tray Separation Roller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller 4-206 Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller 4) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller. • 1 E-ring <Preparation> 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller") 2.

  • Page 528: Cleaning The Pickup And Fixing Feed Assembly

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly 4-207 Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly CAUTION: Installation work gets difficult if the plate and the spring (as shown in the figure) are <Cleaning the Vertical Path Assembly>...
  • Page 529 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly 4-208 5) Clean paper dust on the Vertical Path Sensor 1 (PS24) and the Multi-purpose Tray Last 7) Clean a whole circumference of 10 Rollers by manually rotating them with lint-free paper Paper Sensor (PS28) with a blower.
  • Page 530 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly 4-209 9) Open the Duplex Merging Guide and clean paper dust on the Feed Guide [A] with lint-free <Cleaning the Fixing Feed Assembly> paper. 1) Open the Fixing Feed Unit fully. 2) Open the Registration Upper Guide, insert the paper lint cleaning tool into the clearance between the Registration Upper Guide and the Registration Lower Guide, and clean the feed area [A].
  • Page 531 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly 4-210 3) Insert lint-free paper into the clearance between the Registration Upper Guide and the 5) Point the leading edge of Blower to the Static Eliminator and clean adhered soiling. Registration Lower Guide, and clean the feed area [B] and the sheet on the edge of the Registration Upper Guide.
  • Page 532 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly 4-211 7) Hold the 2 handles to lift the ETB Unit in the direction of the arrow. 9) I return an ETB unit to the original position. 10) Clean the Fixing Inlet Guide [A] with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
  • Page 533 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly 4-212 13) Clean a whole circumference of 4 Rollers by manually rotating them with lint-free paper 15) Clean a whole circumference of 4 Rollers by manually rotating them with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
  • Page 534 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly 4-213 18) Clean paper dust on the feed area [A] inside the equipment with lint-free paper. 19) Open the Duplex Path. 20) Clean paper dust on the feed area [A] of the Duplex Path (Upper/Lower) with lint-free paper.
  • Page 535 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly 4-214 22) Clean paper dust on the Duplex Outlet Sensor (PS64), Duplex Merge Sensor (PS67), and 24) Place a paper on the Duplex Path. Then, point the leading edge of Blower to the Roller Duplex Left Sensor (PS66) with a blower.

  • Page 536: Removing The Left Deck Pickup Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup Unit 4-215 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Unit 3) Remove the Left Deck Pickup Unit. <Preparation> 1. Remove the Right Deck. (Refer to page 4-198) 2. Remove the Left Deck. (Refer to page 4-197) <Procedure>...

  • Page 537: Removing The Right Deck Pickup Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit 4-216 Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit 4) Remove the Right Deck Pickup Unit. • 1 Screw <Preparation> 1. Remove the Right Cover.(Refer to page 4-93) 2.

  • Page 538: Removing The Cassettes 3 And 4 Pickup Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassettes 3 and 4 Pickup Unit 4-217 Removing the Cassettes 3 and 4 Pickup Unit <Procedure> <Preparation> NOTE: This procedure explains the case for Cassette 3 Pickup Unit. 1. Remove the Right Lower Cover. Be sure to perform the same procedure when the Cassette 4 Pickup Unit is used.

  • Page 539: Removing The Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit 4-218 Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit 3) Remove the Pickup Unit. • 1 Screw <Preparation> 1. Remove the Box Cover (Left). 1-1) Remove the Harness.
  • Page 540 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit 4-219 2. Open the Controller Box. 3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover. 2-1) Disconnect the Reader Communication Cable. 3-1) Remove the Rear Lower Cover in the direction of the arrow. •...
  • Page 541 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit 4-220 2) Remove the Shield Plate. 4) Remove the Feed Driver PCB Unit. • 1 Screw • 4 Screws • 2 Protrusions • 13 Connectors •...

  • Page 542: Removing The Registration Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration Unit 4-221 Removing the Registration Unit CAUTION: When installing the handle, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to tighten <Preparation> screws. 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. 1-1) Open the Front Cover.
  • Page 543 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration Unit 4-222 1-3) Push to release the Release Springs at both sides of the Rail, and then further pull <Procedure> out the Fixing Feed Unit until it stops. 1) Remove the Fixing Feed Right Front Upper Cover •...
  • Page 544 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration Unit 4-223 3) Disconnect the 2 connectors. 5) Remove the Registration Unit. • 4 Screws F-4-451 4) Set the ETB Unit back. F-4-453 CAUTION: When installing, be sure to check that the 2 Positioning Pins are secured. F-4-452 F-4-454 4-223...

  • Page 545: Removing The Left Deck Pickup Drive Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup Drive Unit 4-224 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Drive Unit NOTE: When installing the Registration Unit, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure <Preparation>...

  • Page 546: Removing The Main Drive Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit 4-225 Removing the Main Drive Unit 2) Remove the Middle Vertical Path Guide. • 1 Screw <Preparation> 1. Remove the Box Cover (Left). (Refer to "Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit") 2.
  • Page 547 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit 4-226 4) Remove the Shield Plate. NOTE: • 2 Screws When installing the Waste Toner Container Shutter Unit, be sure to follow the order as • 2 Protrusions shown in the figure to tighten screws.
  • Page 548 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit 4-227 8) Loosen the screw and move the Belt Tensioner in the direction of the arrow, and then again CAUTION: tighten the screw. When installing the Feed Driver PCB Unit, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to tighten screws.
  • Page 549 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit 4-228 10) Remove the transformer. 12) Remove the Duct Unit. • 2 Screws • 3 Screws • 3 Connectors • 1 Connector • Harness F-4-468 11) Free the harness and remove the Transformer Support Base. F-4-470 •...
  • Page 550 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit 4-229 14) Remove the Right Rear Handle. 15) Remove the Main Drive Unit. • 4 Screws • 6 Screws • 1 Connector F-4-472 F-4-474 CAUTION: When installing the Right Rear Handle, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to tighten screws.

  • Page 551: External Auxiliary System

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Ozone Filter 4-230 External Auxiliary System Removing the Ozone Filter 1) Remove the Filter Cover. Removing the Filter (for primary charging) • 1 Screw 1) Open the Front Cover. 2) Remove the Filter (for primary charging).

  • Page 552: Removing The Dc Controller Pcb

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the DC Controller PCB 4-231 Removing the DC Controller PCB 2. Open the Controller Box. 2-1) Disconnect the Reader Communication Cable. <Preparation> 1. Remove the Box Cover (Left). 1-1) Remove the Harness. •...
  • Page 553 Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the DC Controller PCB 4-232 <Procedure> 3) Remove the DC Controller PCB in the direction of the arrow. 1) Remove the Controller Box Inner Cover. • 8 Screws • 4 Screws (TP) F-4-484 F-4-482 CAUTION:Points to Caution at Installation...
  • Page 554 Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the DC Controller PCB 4-233 <Processing after replacing the parts> • Get in service mode to enter all the latest service mode values written on the label at the back of the Front Cover. F-4-486 4-233 Parts Replacement and Clearning >...

  • Page 555: Removing The Power Supply Assembly

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Power Supply Assembly 4-234 Removing the Power Supply Assembly 2) Disconnect the 23 Connectors and free the Harness to the top of the Power Supply Assembly. <Preparation> 1. Remove the Box Cover (Left). (Refer to "Removing the DC Controller PCB") 2.

  • Page 556: Removing The Fixing Power Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Fixing Power Unit 4-235 Removing the Fixing Power Unit 2) Remove the Left Upper Cover. • 3 Screws CAUTION:Points to Caution before Operation When executing this procedure, be sure to turn OFF the breaker beforehand. F-4-493 Leakage Breaker 3) Remove the Left Upper Frame.

  • Page 557: Removing The Feed Driver Pcb

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Feed Driver PCB 4-236 Removing the Feed Driver PCB 4) Free the harness and remove the Fixing Power Unit. • 4 Connectors <Preparation> • 2 Screws 1. Remove the Waste Toner Container. (Refer to page 4-145) 2.

  • Page 558: Removing The Arcnet Pcb

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the ARCNET PCB 4-237 Removing the ARCNET PCB 2) Remove the Feed Driver PCB. • 6 Screws <Preparation> • 15 Connectors 1. Remove the Left Rear Cover. (Refer to “Removing Main Controller PCB 2”.) 2.
  • Page 559 Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the ARCNET PCB 4-238 2) Disconnect the cable. 4) Remove the ARCNET PCB. • 2 Wire Saddles • 4 Screws • 1 Connector • Washer • Nut Wire Saddles Washer Connector ARCNET PCB F-4-501...

  • Page 560: Removing The Upper High Voltage Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Upper High Voltage Unit 4-239 Removing the Upper High Voltage Unit 2) Disconnect the connector and Grounding Wire. • 1 Screw <Preparation> 1. Remove the Box Cover (Left). (Refer to "Removing the DC Controller PCB") 2.

  • Page 561: Removing The Flat Control Panel

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Flat Control Panel 4-240 Removing the Flat Control Panel 4) Close the Right Cover. 5) Remove the Right Rear Cover 2. (The removed cover and screws are no longer used.) •...
  • Page 562 Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Flat Control Panel 4-241 7) Open the Upper Right Cover. Remove the 4 screws which secure the Flat Control Panel. 8) Remove the Upper Right Cover. (The removed screws will be used when installing the Front Upper Cover (Middle).) •...
  • Page 563 Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Flat Control Panel 4-242 Move the Flat Control Panel to the front and disconnect the Control Panel Cable and Lift up the Flat Control Panel in the direction of the arrow and pull out the Control Power Supply Cable.
  • Page 564 Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Flat Control Panel 4-243 Disconnect the Control Panel Cable. • 6 Wire Saddles • 1 Connector Control Panel Cable Wire Saddle Wire Saddle F-4-515 CAUTION: • Do not disconnect the Power Supply Cable. •...

  • Page 565: Adjustment

    Adjustment ■ Overview ■ When replacing parts Adjustment...

  • Page 566: Controller System

    Adjustment > When replacing parts > Controller System > HDD Overview When replacing parts In this chapter, measures of adjustment when replacing parts in servicing operation are Controller System mentioned. Parts to be replaced are categorized into 4 blocks based on their related technology as shown below.
  • Page 567 Adjustment > When replacing parts > Controller System > HDD 2. After Replacing When using the Card Reader and imageWARE Accounting Manager 1) HDD format Card ID used for imageWARE Accounting Manager is stored in the HDD, so NSA 1-1) Start with the safe mode. (While pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously, turn collection control is not enabledafter the HDD replacement.

  • Page 568: Main Controller Pcb 1

    Adjustment > When replacing parts > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 1 ■ Main Controller PCB 1 NOTE: Resetting/registering the data is not necessary after Main Controller PCB 1 is replaced. <Procedure of parts replacement> see "Removing Main Controller PCB 1," on p. 4-81. <Procedure of adjustment>...
  • Page 569 Adjustment > When replacing parts > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 2 ■ Main Controller PCB 2 1. Before Replacing Perform the following operations. Be sure to get an approval from the user beforehand. <Procedure of parts replacement> 1) Backup of the set/registered data see "Removing Main Controller PCB 2,"...
  • Page 570 Adjustment > When replacing parts > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 2 2. When Replacing 3. After Replacing 1) Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB 1) After installing the parts, turn ON the main power switch. •...

  • Page 571: Image Formation System

    Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Primary Charging Assembly Image Formation System ■ TPM PCB <Procedure of parts replacement> ■ Primary Charging Wire see "Removing Main Controller PCB 1," on p. 4-81. <Procedure of parts replacement> <Procedure of adjustment>...
  • Page 572 Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Primary Charging Assembly Make the resin screws [A] and [C] a full turn clockwise. While referring to the When the rear side test print image is dark replacement procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly, install it to the main body, output NOTE: a test print and check the image.

  • Page 573: Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly

    Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Pre-transfer Charging Wire ■ Pre-transfer Charging Assembly CAUTION: <Procedure of parts replacement> Since uneven density might occur, be sure to adjust by turning the 2 adjustment see "Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly," on p. 4-108. screws with the same amount.

  • Page 574: Photosensitive Drum

    Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Photosensitive Drum 5-10 ■ Photosensitive Drum 3) Affix the ID Label included in the drum to the inside of the Front Cover. <Procedure of parts replacement> see "Removing the Photosensitive Drum," on p. 4-122. <Procedure of adjustment>...

  • Page 575: Drum Side Seals (Front And Rear)

    Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Waste Toner Container 5-11 ■ Drum Side Seals (Front and Rear) ■ ETB Unit / ETB <Procedure of parts replacement> <Procedure of parts replacement> see "Removing the Side Seal," on p. 4-128. •...

  • Page 576: Fixing System

    Adjustment > When replacing parts > External Auxiliary System > DC Controller PCB 5-12 Fixing System External Auxiliary System ■ Fixing Roller ■ DC Controller PCB <Procedure of parts replacement> <Procedure of parts replacement> see "Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper," on p. 4-186. see "Removing the DC Controller PCB,"...

  • Page 577: Troubleshooting

    Troubleshooting ■ Test Print ■ Image Faults ■ Feed Faults ■ Other ■ Version upgrade ■ Making Initial Checks ■ Error Messages ■ Error Codes Troubleshooting...

  • Page 578: Overview

    Troubleshooting > Test Print > Overview Test Print Overview Image check item Uneven Right angle Pattern Transfer Black White Uneven density accuracy Side Magnification PCB to generate PG TYPE Gradation Fogging Shock failure line line pitch (rear/ Straight line registration ratio front) accuracy...

  • Page 579: How To View The Test Print

    Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > 17 gradations (TYPE=2/3) How to View the Test Print ■ 17 gradations (TYPE=2/3) ■ Grid (TYPE=1) F-6-2 Check item Check method Assumed cause F-6-1 Check whether gradation in density is Drum failure, laser exposure system failure Gradation made appropriately.

  • Page 580: Solid White (Type=4)

    Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > Halftone (TYPE=5/6/11/12/13/14) ■ Solid white (TYPE=4) NOTE: • When outputting a halftone test print, be sure to use PG TYPE:6 except in the following cases. 1. When checking the image of side registration adjustment, use PG TYPE:11. 2.

  • Page 581: Solid Black (Type=7)

    Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > Horizontal line (TYPE=8/9/10) ■ Solid black (TYPE=7) ■ Horizontal line (TYPE=8/9/10) F-6-5 F-6-6 Check item Check method Assumed cause Check item Check method Assumed cause Check the evenness of halftone Laser light path failure, grid failure, Transfer system failure or Pre-transfer Transfer failure...

  • Page 582: Image Faults

    Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Trailing Edge Shock Imaget Image Faults [Image Sample] Feed direction Trailing Edge Shock Imaget <Shock image located approx. 63mm 55mm from the trailing edge> [Location] .ETB [Cause] Lines occur on the image due to shock when distortion on the belt is released while rotation speed between the ETB and drum differs [Condition] When replacing the ETB...

  • Page 583: Uneven Density Correction By 2D Shading

    Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Uneven density correction by 2D shading Uneven density correction by 2D shading 3) Output a halftone image with the following conditions and check if uneven density occurs. COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE 6 To correct uneven image density caused by uneven potential on the surface of the Drum. Select the cassette which the following paper is set: COPIER>TEST>PG>PG-PICK A3 (LDR) or larger.
  • Page 584 Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Uneven density correction by 2D shading CAUTION: NOTE: For the test print, the following 3 types can be output, but basically set SHD-P1 to It is difficult to judge whether uneven potential of the Photosensitive Drum causes output.
  • Page 585 Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Uneven density correction by 2D shading As the value is larger, the density becomes lighter. As the value is smaller, the density 5-4) Adjust the target vertical scanning direction (1 to 27) which uneven density is seen. becomes darker.

  • Page 586: Adf Black Line

    Troubleshooting > Image Faults > ADF black line 6-10 ADF black line 5-5) After the adjustment, output a test print and check the image to complete the procedure. Image processing has been improved with this equipment, which applies optimal image processing to the text part and the photo part respectively.

  • Page 587: Separation Failure Jam Due To Deformation Of Separation Claw

    Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Separation Failure Jam due to Deformation of Separation Claw 6-11 [Remedy] Changing the setting value in the following service mode improves the problem of a black Separation Failure Jam due to Deformation of line. Separation Claw COPIER >...

  • Page 588: Image Error Due To Soil Attached To The Cleaning Brushes For The Duplex Right Roller And The Duplex Outlet Roller

    Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller 6-12 Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning [Image Sample] Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Feed Direction Outlet Roller <Soil attached.143mm from the paper edge>...
  • Page 589 Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller 6-13 <Procedure> 4) Remove the left side Duct. 1) Open the Duplex Path. • 1 Connector 2) Remove the Fixed Feed Cover 1.
  • Page 590 Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller 6-14 5) Remove the Duplex Driver PCB and the Mounting Base. 6) Remove the following parts. •...
  • Page 591 Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller 6-15 9) Remove the following parts. 11) Place a sheet of paper on the Duplex Path, and remove a N-ring each from the Duplex •...
  • Page 592 Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller 6-16 13) Pull out the Duplex Right Roller and remove the shaft at the rear. 14) Move the Duplex Right Roller toward the rear and remove the shaft from the Fixing Feed Unit Side Plate.
  • Page 593 Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller 6-17 16) Remove the 4 Cleaning Brushes contacting the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet 18) Remove the paper on the Duplex Path, and clean the entire perimeter of each of the 4 Roller.

  • Page 594: Uneven Density

    Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Uneven density 6-18 Uneven density 20) Clean the four areas on the removed Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. [Cause] Uneven density occurs on the image because of uneven developing performance or change in drum characteristics due to wear.

  • Page 595: Smeared Image

    Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Smeared image 6-19 Smeared image [Cause] Feed Direction Excess toner is transferred on the paper that causes toner collapse at the time of fixing, which can generate smeared image on the image. The following are assumed causes of smeared F-6-37 image: In the case of dark/light image at either the left or right side on the image in horizontal...
  • Page 596 Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Smeared image 6-20 [Field Remedy] Select the following: “Settings/Registration > Adjustment Maintenance > Adjust Image > Auto Adjust Gradation; and check the output result. Start the field remedy 1) In COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > P-TR-OF1, set the values to "4", "7", and "-10" in that order from the left, and check the output result.

  • Page 597: Adjusting The Edge Emphasis Level

    Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Adjusting the Edge Emphasis Level 6-21 Adjusting the Edge Emphasis Level Example: In the case of the environment where the relative value "135" is suitable as the default value. 1) Set "SHARP" to "4". The edge emphasis level of image can be adjusted in both user mode and service mode, but 2) Set "Sharpness", which is set to "+1"...

  • Page 598: Mtf Adjustment

    Troubleshooting > Image Faults > MTF Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure 6-22 MTF Adjustment ■ Adjustment Procedure 1) Obtain the MTF adjustment chart. The MTF value of the Reader Unit may differ from the factory setting value depending on the condition of transportation/storage. If the machine is installed without correcting the value, it may cause an image failure such as moire.

  • Page 599: When Making Fine Adjustment After Sampling The Mtf Value

    Troubleshooting > Image Faults > MTF Adjustment > When Disabling the MTF Adjustment 6-23 3) Execute sampling of the MTF value. ■ When Making Fine Adjustment After Sampling the MTF Value Description of adjustment Color/B&W (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > 1) Set the MTF value for fine adjustment to “1”.

  • Page 600: Feed Faults

    Troubleshooting > Other > Adjusting rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm 6-24 Feed Faults Other Paper wrinkle Adjusting rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm <Location> If rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm has become loose, retighten the Fixation Screws Fixing Roller, Pressure Roller securing the Arm Rotation Adjustment Ring according to the following procedure.
  • Page 601 Troubleshooting > Other > Adjusting rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm 6-25 1) Open the DADF and loosen the 2 Fixation Screws securing the Arm Rotation Adjustment 3) Pull out the Upright Control Panel and the Arm Shaft, and rotate the Arm Rotation Ring.

  • Page 602: Remedy To Be Implemented When The Etb Disengage Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) Is Left Unremoved

    Troubleshooting > Other > Remedy to be implemented when the ETB Disengage Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) is left unremoved 6-26 Remedy to be implemented when the ETB Disengage 3) Remove the Fixing Feed Right Front Cover. • 2 Screws Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) is left unremoved When the power is turned ON after installation, E017-0003 may occur due to the ETB Disengage Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) left unremoved.
  • Page 603 Troubleshooting > Other > Remedy to be implemented when the ETB Disengage Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) is left unremoved 6-27 5) Remove the Fan Duct. 7) Remove the Transfer Frame Stopper. • 2 Screws Duct Transfer Frame Stopper F-6-51 F-6-49 6) Rotate the Disengage Gear about 90 degrees counterclockwise by hand and lower the ITB Unit.

  • Page 604: Checking Nip Width

    Troubleshooting > Other > Checking nip width 6-28 Checking nip width In the case of paper wrinkle or fixing failure, check that the fixing nip width is within the specified range. Note that the fixing nip width of this equipment cannot be adjusted in the field.

  • Page 605: Controller Self Diagnosis

    Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview > Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool 6-29 Controller Self Diagnosis Overview Two types of error diagnosis tools are installed in this machine, and stored in the locations Introduction shown below. Operation of the (2 types of) error diagnosis tools added to the main body and remedy for DC Controler PCB errors are described.

  • Page 606: Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool

    Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview > Layout Drawing 6-30 ■ Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool Main Controller PCB 1 This tool automatically checks the Main Controller PCB 1/2, child PCBs mounted on the Main Voice Controller PCB 1/2, and HDD, and display the result on the Control Panel. Operation/ This tool is installed in HDD.

  • Page 607: Basic Flowchart

    Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Basic Flowchart 6-31 Basic Flowchart Main Controller PCB 2 Basic Check Items Check all of the items shown below. Turn O N the m ain pow er s witc h. Data Analyzer Board Does the Pow er Supply LED Ex ec ute bas ic c hec k.

  • Page 608: Basic Check Items

    Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Boot System Error Diagnosis 6-32 ■ Basic Check Items ■ Boot System Error Diagnosis 1. Check if the Leakage Breaker is turned OFF. 1) Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the Control Panel Power Supply 2.

  • Page 609: Diagnosis Time

    Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Diagnosis Time 6-33 2) Right after the Main Power Supply Lamp lights up once, it lights out instantly, and diagnosis <When an error is detected by diagnosis> starts. The Main Power Supply Lamp repeats high-speed blinking after completion of a check in (When the Main Power Supply Lamp lights out, you can release your finger from the which an error is detected.

  • Page 610: Error Diagnosis

    Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis > Boot Method 6-34 Controller System Error Diagnosis ■ Error Diagnosis <Boot System Error Diagnosis Table> ■ Boot Method The error locations are identified according to the following table. 1) Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys '2' and '4' simultaneously.

  • Page 611: Diagnosis Time

    Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis > Diagnosis Time 6-35 2) Keep pressing the numeric keys (for approx. 20 seconds) until the following screen appears ■ Diagnosis Time on the Control Panel. Diagnosis is completed in approx. 3 minutes. The result is displayed on the Control Panel.
  • Page 612 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis > Diagnosis Time 6-36 [no] means that optional PCBs are not mounted. Assumed Error Error Test Name Description Remedy When [no] is displayed although an optional PCB is mounted, it means that an error has been Location Code SN-6 SM...

  • Page 613: Restrictions

    Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis > Restrictions 6-37 Assumed Error Error Assumed Error Error Test Name Description Remedy Test Name Description Remedy Location Code Location Code SN-13 TPM Check failure of the Main Controller 1. Check the installation of the TPM E746 SN-22 Check failure between...

  • Page 614: Version Upgrade

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Overview of Version Upgrade 6-38 Version upgrade Overview ■ Overview of Version Upgrade The system software version is upgraded in 2 steps, downloading and writing the new version of the system software. ● Downloading System Software This machine supports the following 3 downloading methods.

  • Page 615: Writing System Software

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Download Mode 6-39 ■ Writing System Software ■ Download Mode The system software downloaded in either of the above-mentioned methods is stored in the When the version is upgraded via SST or with the USB memory storage device storage temporary memory space.
  • Page 616 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > System Software Components 6-40 ■ System Software Components The table below shows the system software components for this machine. Display on SST How to upgrade versions Registered Name of Software to be upgraded Remarks name of system...

  • Page 617: Note On Download Process

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Note on Download Process 6-41 The Image Reader for this machine consists of 2-sided Single Pass and 2-sided Double ■ Note on Download Process Pass, requiring specific system software for each. • The name of the system software for the 2-sided Single Pass Image Reader (Duplex Color Warning: Never turn OFF the power during the download / writing process.

  • Page 618: Version Upgrade Via Sst

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Overview 6-42 Version Upgrade via SST ● Downloading the System Software System software is saved in the temporary storage area on HDD after downloaded with SST. ■ Overview Restart the machine after download so that it will be written to the system area, and the flash ROM.

  • Page 619: Copying System Software

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Copying System Software 6-43 ■ Copying System Software 5) Select the drive where the system CD is set and click “Search” button. ● System CD -> SST Copy the system software stored in the system CD to SST. NOTE: The system software is compressed if the file size exceeds the CD memory capacity.

  • Page 620: Connection

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Connection 6-44 7) The message is shown when the system software is successfully copied. Click “OK” button. ■ Connection The following IP address is automatically set for this machine at start-up in Download mode. •...
  • Page 621 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Connection 6-45 4) Check the IP address of the PC. Go to Start menu to select Program > Accessory > Command Prompt. Type IPCONFIG and press [Return] to see the network settings of the PC. If any discrepancies from the description in the figure below are found, change the network settings of the PC.

  • Page 622: Downloading System Software (Assist Mode)

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Assist mode) 6-46 ■ Downloading System Software (Assist mode) NOTE: When You was connected to the main body of Safe mode in Assist mode: 1) Start this machine and enter Download mode (COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > A system software of LANGUAGE, RUI, MEAPCONT, SDICT can acquire version DOWNLOAD).

  • Page 623: Downloading System Software (Single Mode)

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode) 6-47 displayed. ■ Downloading System Software (Single mode) The following is the sample steps to download DCON (the other components of the system software can be downloaded similarly). NOTE:Download Confirmation Message Modes 1) Start the machine in an appropriate Download mode.
  • Page 624 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode) 6-48 NOTE: NOTE:Download Confirmation Message Modes The following device information is shown at the right top of SST screen. Download is confirmed in any of the three message modes. •...
  • Page 625 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode) 6-49 6) Click “Shutdown / Restart” button. NOTE: If it is before restarting the machine, the downloaded system software can be deleted not written on HDD or Flash ROM. 1) Click “Clear”...

  • Page 626: Formatting Hdd

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD 6-50 ■ Formatting HDD When executing format ALL When executing format BOOTDEV startup in normal mode ● Overview Execute format BOOTDEV Execute format ALL This machine probides the following two types of HDD Formatting. •...
  • Page 627 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD 6-51 When executing format ALL startup in normal mode NOTE: When executing format BOOTDEV When executing format ALL With SSTv4.41, due to sharing the simple mode processing with the existing models, the following screen is displayed.
  • Page 628 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD 6-52 ● Steps of Formatting 5) Select "BOOTDEV" or "ALL" to click "Start". 1) Enter Download mode. (Enter Safe mode when you mount the new HDD or when the machine is unable to start normally due to HDD failures, etc.) 2) Connect the PC to the machine to start SST.
  • Page 629 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD 6-53 7) Download the system software in any Download mode (Assist mode recommended). See ● Mounting New HDD the steps to download the system software for details. After HDD set as the service parts is mounted, the new HDD should be formatted initially. In this case, the message is shown to confirm if the new HDD is mounted.

  • Page 630: Backup

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup 6-54 When the new HDD is mounted, the machine cannot be started in the normal procedure. ■ Backup Start the machine in Safe mode as Download mode. When gaining connection to SST, the ●...
  • Page 631 The backup data can be restored from Service mode when the PCBs are replaced. This enables to maintain the setting data including Service mode stored in the old Reader • When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of Controller PCB.
  • Page 632 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup 6-56 3) Select the model to be connected and the information file for individual download (“Single”). 5) Select “MeapBack.bin” to click “Start” button. Check the network settings and click “Start”. F-6-107 6) Enter the file name to be saved and comments when necessary.
  • Page 633 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup 6-57 ● Steps to Download Data 4) Click “Download Data” button. CAUTION: The backup data can be downloaded to the machine from which the data were uploaded Store Meapbackup.bin; and "Settings/Registration > Data Management> Initialize All Data/Setings";...

  • Page 634: Version Upgrade Using Usb Memory Storage Device

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Relation between SST and USB memory Storage Device 6-58 Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device ● Downloading System Software Copy the system software from SST to the USB memory storage device storage device. ■...

  • Page 635: Copying System Software

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software 6-59 ■ Copying System Software 5) Select the drive where the system CD is set and click “Search” button. ● System CD to SST Copy the system software stored in the system CD to SST.
  • Page 636 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software 6-60 7) The message is shown when the system software is copied. Click “OK” button. ● SST to USB memory Storage Device Copy the system software stored in SST to the USB memory storage device storage device. Preparation Requirements: •...
  • Page 637 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software 6-61 4) Click the USB icon shown in "Select the target" Screen. 6) Select “Series” and “Version” (the System Version). F-6-118 F-6-120 5) Select the drive (removable disk) where the USB memory storage device storage device is NOTE: inserted.

  • Page 638: Connection

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Connection 6-62 ■ Connection NOTE: When the accessory configuration is known for the machine where the system software is to be downloaded, uncheck the boxes of unnecessary accessories. E753-0001 is CAUTION: triggered if the software for an unnecessary accessory is downloaded.

  • Page 639: Upgrading System Software

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Upgrading System Software 6-63 3) Switch to the download mode to use. ■ Upgrading System Software • In the case of normal mode (Recommended) ● Menu/Function Overview Select the following in Service Mode: COPIER >...
  • Page 640 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Upgrading System Software 6-64 ● Points to Note When Operating/Using System Software CAUTION:Caution when the power is turned OFF Be sure to execute shutdown sequence to quit download mode. NOTE: The following download method is recommended to execute normal download of the Pressing the [Reset] key and then the [0] key on the menu screen executes the...

  • Page 641: Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic) 6-65 ■ Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic) 3) Press the key on the Control Panel. [1] -> [0]: To execute downloading/Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen. ●...

  • Page 642: Downloading System Software (Confirmation)

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Confirmation) 6-66 Once downloading is complete, this machine is automatically restarted to start writing to the ■ Downloading System Software (Confirmation) HDD system area/flash ROM. ●...
  • Page 643 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Confirmation) 6-67 Operation procedure Once downloading is complete, a message is displayed to encourage pressing the “Reset” 1) Enter download mode. key. 2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port. 3) Press the key on the Control Panel.

  • Page 644: Downloading System Software (Overwriting)

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Overwriting) 6-68 ■ Downloading System Software (Overwriting) CAUTION: ● [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) In overwriting download mode of the USB memory storage device, all the system software stored in the USB memory storage device is downloaded as well.

  • Page 645: Formatting Hdd

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Formatting HDD 6-69 ■ Formatting HDD When executing format BOOTDEV When executing format ALL ● HDD Format Overview Execute format BOOTDEV Execute format ALL The following 2 types of formatting methods are available with this machine: •...

  • Page 646: Backup

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Formatting HDD 6-70 ● [4]: Format HDD 4) Press the key on the Control Panel. [1] -> [0]: To execute formatting BOOTDEV/Any key other than [0]: To return to the menu This mode executes formatting of BOOTDEV partition or the entire HDD.
  • Page 647 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Other Menu 6-71 ■ Backup This function is used to clear the downloaded file without writing it after downloading the system software in menu [2] or [3]. ●...

  • Page 648: Troubleshooting

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Troubleshooting > Error Code: E753-0001 6-72 Troubleshooting ● [1]: Version Information ■ Error Code: E753-0001 This mode displays the version of download mode. ● Cause In the case of an error during writing process of the system software or in the case of writing the system software of the option that is not installed, an error is determined to display E753- 0001.

  • Page 649: Making Initial Checks

    Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > List of Initial Check Items 6-73 Making Initial Checks List of Initial Check Items Item Detail Check Site Environment The voltage of the power supply is as rated (±10%). The site is not a high temperature / humidity environment (near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifi er), and it is not in a cold place.

  • Page 650: Version Upgrade Via Cds

    Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Overview of Preparation 6-74 Version Upgrade via CDS Preparation ■ Overview ■ Overview of Preparation Among the 4 methods in which service technicians provide firmware install services, the The following should be prepared before using Updater. following 3 methods are available using Updater functions.

  • Page 651: Setting Sales Company's

    Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Network Settings 6-75 ■ Setting Sales Company’s HQ ■ Network Settings When using devices input in the markets listed below, the default setting of Sales Company’s 1. Connecting to External Network HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS. Unless the setting is The method of connecting to external network is similar to a normal network connection changed properly, the desired firmware may not be able to be selected.
  • Page 652 Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Network Settings 6-76 3. Press [Software Management Settings] button. 5. Ensure to enter “https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif” in the field beside the [Delivery Server URL] button. If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field, click [Delivery Server URL] button to show the virtual keypad.
  • Page 653 Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Network Settings 6-77 3. Communication Test 3. Press [Software Management Settings] button. This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution server and/or the file server. 1.

  • Page 654: Enabling Ugw Link

    Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Enabling UGW Link 6-78 5. Press [Yes] button. ■ Enabling UGW Link When installing the firmware in the method of “UGW-linked Download and Update” or “UGW- linked Download”, the following should be set before actually using UGW link. Setting of Device COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-UGW Service Mode...

  • Page 655: Ugw-Linked Download And Update (Full-Remote Update)

    Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update) 6-79 a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-remote b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update) Update) See the figure below for the operational flow of “UGW-linked download”. See the figure below for the operational flow of “UGW-linked Download and Update”. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 1...
  • Page 656 Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update) 6-80 2. Press [Updater] button. 4. Press [Apply Firmware] button. F-6-153 F-6-155 3. Press [Update Firmware] button. 5. Confirm the downloaded firmware and press [Yes] button. F-6-156 F-6-154 6-80 Troubleshooting >...

  • Page 657: Manual Download And Update (On-Site Update From Service Mode)

    Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) 6-81 c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from 6. The firmware is applied to the device. The device is automatically restarted when the firmware is successfully applied.
  • Page 658 Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) 6-82 3. Press [Update Firmware] button. 5. [Special Firmware] screen is shown as below. Enter the fields and press [OK] button. F-6-161 • [Retrieval ID]: F-6-159 Enter numeric up to 8 characters.
  • Page 659 Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) 6-83 6. [New Firmware] screen is shown as below. Check the contents and press [Next] button. 7. [Delivery Settings] screen is shown as below. Enter the fields and press [OK] button. F-6-162 F-6-163 •...
  • Page 660 Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) 6-84 • [E-mail]: 8. Confirm Export Criteria screen is shown as below. Check the contents and press [Accept] E-mails concerning update statuses are sent from the device to the contact registered here. button.
  • Page 661 Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) 6-85 • When Distribution Time and Timing to Apply of Distribution Setting are set to [Now] and STEP 2: Update using Updater [Manual], respectively: The firmware downloaded to the device can be updated using Updater functions.
  • Page 662 Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) 6-86 3. Press [Update Firmware] button. 5. Confirm the downloaded firmware and press [Yes] button. F-6-171 6. The firmware is applied to the device. The device is automatically restarted when the F-6-169 firmware is successfully applied.

  • Page 663: Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule

    Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule 6-87 Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule 4. Press [Delete Scheduled Delivery] button. This section describes how to delete firmware distribution schedule set by Updater. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 1).

  • Page 664: Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware)

    Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware) 6-88 Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware) 4. Press [Apply Firmware] button. This section describes how to update the downloaded firmware. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 1). Press [Setting/Registration (User mode)] button on the control panel. 2).

  • Page 665: Deleting Downloaded Firmware

    Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Deleting Downloaded Firmware 6-89 Deleting Downloaded Firmware 7. When the device is restarted, confirm the version of the firmware. 1). Press [Check Counter Key] button on the control panel. This section describes how to delete the downloaded firmware using Updater. 2).

  • Page 666: Troubleshooting On Firmware Installation

    Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation 6-90 Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation 4. Press [Delete Firmware] button. No.1 Symptom: I can’t find the firmware to be updated using Updater. Cause: Preparation has not been properly done. Action: Confirm the setting of Sales Company’s HQ bellow. Setting of Device [SERVICE MODE] (Level1) COPIER >...
  • Page 667 Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation 6-91 No.2 Symptom: Firmware download is aborted during operation using Updater functions. Cause: The network cable is disconnected or the power went off due to blackout and the like. Action: Retry download. Firmware under download is cancelled upon aborted. No.3 Symptom: Firmware update is aborted during operation using Updater functions and the device cannot be started.

  • Page 668: Information Required For Reports

    Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Information required for Reports > Information to Report 6-92 Information required for Reports No.5 Symptom: The firmware presumed to be downloaded to the device cannot be found. ■ Information required for Service Technicians to Obtain on Site Cause: Since only 1 firmware can be held on the device, the firmware previously downloaded was overridden by the newly downloaded one.

  • Page 669: Debug Logs

    Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Debug Logs > Obtaining Log Files 6-93 Debug Logs 3. From “Display Logs/Communication Test” screen, obtain System Logs (log level 4) and Update Logs by copy & paste. ■ Obtaining Log Files Top page (Remote UI) > [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [License/ Others] >...

  • Page 670: Error Messages

    Troubleshooting > Error Messages 6-94 Error Messages Error messages displayed in LUI on a device are shown below. As to error codes, see the next list. Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy An error occurred with the delivery In communicating with the System error occurred in server.
  • Page 671 Troubleshooting > Error Messages 6-95 Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy Delivery Server : Connect Failed Communication test, etc. In the communication test, failed to connect to the Check the network environment of the device, and re-execute the job. File Server : Retrieve Failed (communication test result delivery server.
  • Page 672 Troubleshooting > Error Messages 6-96 Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy An error occurred. communication test, etc. The max value (space/file) was exceeded and new Check if the log file exceeded the max value. Error Code: [xxx] (main screen) log was not accepted. <Update log>...
  • Page 673 Troubleshooting > Error Messages 6-97 Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy An error occurred. UGW linkage (main UGW linkage was turned ON when eRDS was OFF.For a device using eRDS, turn ON the eRDS. For a device not using eRDS, turn OFF the Error Code: [xxx] screen) UGW linkage.
  • Page 674 Troubleshooting > Error Messages 6-98 Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy An error occurred. Check the Update UGW linkage (main eRDS sent an order but Updater failed to connect Conduct a communication test to analyze the cause of the error. After solving the cause, Firmware screen.
  • Page 675 Troubleshooting > Error Messages 6-99 Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy Delivery Error UGW linkage (Update eRDS sent an order but Updater failed to connect Conduct a communication test to analyze the cause of the error. After solving the cause, Error Code: [xxx] Firmware screen) to the server.

  • Page 676: Error Codes

    Troubleshooting > Error Codes > How to read an error code 6-100 Error Codes Error Codes displayed on LUI in a device and how to read them. How to read an error code 8401 4206 Code Value Contents The first digit Error Error field The second digit...

  • Page 677: Error Code

    Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code 6-101 Error Code The error code list is shown below. Remedy are error codes of "-", and for all the error codes out of the list, contact Field Suppot Group in the sales company. Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy...
  • Page 678 Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code 6-102 Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error The first The second The 3rd - 4th The 5th digit The 6 - 8th digits CDS file Network digit Error digit digits Method Category Description delivery...
  • Page 679 Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code 6-103 Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error The first The second The 3rd - 4th The 5th digit The 6 - 8th digits CDS file Network digit Error digit digits Method Category Description delivery...
  • Page 680 Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code 6-104 Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error The first The second The 3rd - 4th The 5th digit The 6 - 8th digits CDS file Network digit Error digit digits Method Category Description delivery...

  • Page 681: Debug Log

    * Collection of Sublog is not necessary when the reproduction procedure is identified and ■ Purpose the error can be reproduced by the sales company HQ or the Canon staff who is in charge • When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of debug log of quality follow-up.

  • Page 682: Collecting System Information

    Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device) > Manual Saving by Holding Down the Counter + 1.2.3 6-106 Collecting System Information machine. If the screen changes by pressing the OK button, data transfer has been completed. ■...

  • Page 683: Debug-1

    Troubleshooting > Debug log > DEBUG-1 > Function 6-107 DEBUG-1 ■ Function Service Mode Lev.2 COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD > DEBUG-1 F-6-189 F-6-188 DEBUG-1 Setting of log type and save timing Lv.2 Details To set the types of logs to be stored and the timing to store logs in the HDD. Note: Date to be added to the file name shows the date that the log was transferred.

  • Page 684: Uploading Data By Sst

    Troubleshooting > Debug log > Uploading Data by SST > Preconditions: 6-108 Uploading Data by SST The following shows a method to collect a log by connecting a PC with SST (Ver. 4.41 or later) running to the machine. ■ Preconditions: The log is stored in the machine by holding down the counter + 1.2.3 or the automatic log collection function.
  • Page 685 Troubleshooting > Debug log > Uploading Data by SST > Preconditions: 6-109 5. Check that the data storage is completed and click the "OK" button. F-6-192 4. Press the "Save" button. F-6-194 6. Check that the log is stored in the specified location in the PC. In the initial setting: Windows(C:) >...

  • Page 686: Error Code Overview

    Error Code ■ Overview ■ Error Code ■ Jam Code ■ Alarm Code Error Code...

  • Page 687: Outline

    Error Code > Overview > Outline > Points to Note When Clearing HDD Overview ■ Pickup position code When jam occurs, pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code. Outline Pickup position Pickup position code This chapter describes various codes which are displayed when a failure occurs on the At Finisher jam/At error avoidance jam/At ADF jam without pickup product.

  • Page 688: Error Code

    Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069 Error Code Detail Location Item Description Code Code E001 -0002 Title Fixing Assembly high temperature error (software detection) Error Code Details Remedy 1. Check if the cable of the Thermistor is caught. -> Replace the Thermistors.
  • Page 689 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E002 -0001 Title Fixing Assembly temperature rise error E004 -0010 Title Fixing Power Supply error Remedy 1.
  • Page 690 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E013 -0001 Title Error in Waste Toner Lock Detection Connector disconnection E017 -0001 Title ETB disengagement error Remedy Check the connection of the Waste Toner Lock Detection Remedy...
  • Page 691 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E017 -0003 Title ETB HP error E020 -0000 Title Developing Assembly toner absent error Remedy If this error occurs at installation, the ETB Disengage Member Remedy 1.
  • Page 692 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E020 -0003 Title Error in the Toner Excess Supply Sensor connection detection E023 -0002 Title Error in Magnet Roller Clutch connection detection Remedy 1.
  • Page 693 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E041 -0002 Title Left Deck Lifter Motor error E060 -0001 Title Primary Charging Shutter HP open error Remedy 1.
  • Page 694 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E060 -0002 Title Primary Charging Shutter HP close error E061 -0001 Title Potential control error (VL) Remedy 1.
  • Page 695 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069 7-10 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E061 -0101 Title Potential control error (VD) E065 -0001 Title Primary charging/grid high voltage output leak error Remedy 1.
  • Page 696 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069 7-11 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E066 -0001 Title Pre-transfer Charging Shutter HP open error E066 -0002 Title Pre-transfer Charging Shutter HP close error Remedy 1.
  • Page 697 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069 7-12 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E067 -0001 Title Developing high voltage output leak error E069 -0001 Title Transfer high voltage output leak error Remedy 1.

  • Page 698: E100 To E197

    Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197 7-13 ■ E100 to E197 Detail Location Item Description Code Code Detail Location Item Description E100 -13xx Title Polygon Motor BD unlock error (Laser diode is not lit up/ Code Code failure of the BD PCB/power supply error, or condensation)
  • Page 699 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197 7-14 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E102 -0001 Title EEPROM writing error E110 -12xx Title Polygon Motor FG unlock error Remedy 1.
  • Page 700 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197 7-15 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E121 -0001 Title Laser Scanner Cooling Fan error E197 -0003 Title Error in Duplex Driver PCB connection detection Remedy 1.
  • Page 701 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197 7-16 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E197 -0006 Title Error in Feed Driver PCB Drawer Connector connection E197 -0011 Title Error in Developing High Voltage PCB connection detection detection Remedy...

  • Page 702: E202 To E280

    Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280 7-17 ■ E202 to E280 Detail Location Item Description Code Code Detail Location Item Description E227 -0003 Title Power supply (24V) error Code Code Remedy 1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Reader Power E202 -0001 Title Scanner HP error...
  • Page 703 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280 7-18 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E240 -0001 Title 3 minutes passed with pickup request waiting status E247 -0002 Title System error Remedy 1.
  • Page 704 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280 7-19 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E263 -0001 Title Current Sensor error E270 -0002 Title Error in horizontal scanning/vertical scanning synchronous signal Remedy 1.

  • Page 705: E301 To E355

    Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E301 to E355 7-20 ■ E301 to E355 Detail Location Item Description Code Code Detail Location Item Description E315 -0025 Title Codec error Code Code Remedy Replacement of the Main Controller PCB. E301 -0001 Title Paper front light intensity NG...
  • Page 706 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E301 to E355 7-21 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E315 -0530 Title Codec error E350 -0001 Title System error Remedy jcdImage device. Remedy Contact to the sales companies.

  • Page 707: E400 To E490

    Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E400 to E490 7-22 ■ E400 to E490 Detail Location Item Description Code Code Detail Location Item Description E407 -0001 Title Tray Lifter Motor (M8) error Code Code Remedy 1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Tray HP E400 -0001 Title Communication error between Reader Controller PCB (PCB1)
  • Page 708 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E400 to E490 7-23 Detail Location Item Description Code Code E413 -0011 Title DADF Disengagement Motor 2 (M7) error Remedy 1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Disengagement HP Sensor 2 (SR16). 2.

  • Page 709: E500 To E5F6

    Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F6 7-24 ■ E500 to E5F6 Detail Location Item Description Code Code Detail Location Item Description E505 -0002 Title EEPROM error (External 2 Hole Puncher) Code Code Remedy The Punch Controller PCB is faulty.
  • Page 710 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F6 7-25 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E519 -0002 Title Gear change home position error (Finisher-E1) E531 -8001 Title Staple home position error (Finisher-E1) Remedy 1.
  • Page 711 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F6 7-26 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E535 -8002 Title Swing home position error (Finisher-E1) E540 -8002 Title Tray 1 shift area error (Finisher-E1) Remedy 1.
  • Page 712 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F6 7-27 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E540 -8006 Title The Tray 1 Shift Motor acceleration error (Finisher-E1) E542 -8004 Title The Tray 2 Shift Motor clock error (Finisher-E1) Remedy 1.
  • Page 713 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F6 7-28 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E551 -0021 Title Error in the Power Supply Fan of the Paper Folding Unit E569 -8001 Title Upper Stopper Motor of Paper Folding Unit failed to go...
  • Page 714 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F6 7-29 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E56A -8002 Title C-fold Stopper Motor of Paper Folding Unit failed to return to E584 -8001 Title Shutter home position error (Finisher-E1)
  • Page 715 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F6 7-30 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E591 -8002 Title Scrap full detection error (External 2 Hole Puncher) E592 -8005 Title Horizontal Registration Sensor 2 error (External 2 Hole Puncher) Remedy...
  • Page 716 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F6 7-31 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E592 -800A Title Horizontal Registration Sensor 4 error (External 2 Hole E5E1 -0002 Title Tray Lift Motor of Paper Folding Unit failed to return to HP Puncher) (Document Insertion Unit-L1)
  • Page 717 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F6 7-32 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E5F0 -8002 Title Paper positioning plate home position error (Finisher-E1) E5F3 -8001 Title Aligning plate home position error (Finisher-E1) Remedy 1.
  • Page 718 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F6 7-33 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E5F6 -8001 Title Paper pushing plate home position error (Finisher-E1) E5F6 -8005 Title Pushing position error (Finisher-E1) Remedy 1.

  • Page 719: E602

    Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-34 ■ E602 Detail Location Item Description Code Code Detail Location Item Description E602 -0012 Title Hard disk error Code Code Remedy 1. Reinstall the system. E602 -0001 Title Hard disk error 2.
  • Page 720 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-35 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -0104 Title Hard disk error E602 -0113 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be 2.
  • Page 721 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-36 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -0122 Title Hard disk error E602 -0200 Title Hard disk error Remedy Error due to data corruption or software bug. Remedy 1.
  • Page 722 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-37 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -0204 Title Hard disk error E602 -0213 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be 2.
  • Page 723 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-38 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -0222 Title Hard disk error E602 -0300 Title Hard disk error Remedy Error due to data corruption or software bug. Remedy 1.
  • Page 724 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-39 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -0304 Title Hard disk error E602 -0313 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be 2.
  • Page 725 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-40 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -0322 Title Hard disk error E602 -0400 Title Hard disk error Remedy Error due to data corruption or software bug. Remedy 1.
  • Page 726 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-41 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -0404 Title Hard disk error E602 -0413 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be 2.
  • Page 727 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-42 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -0422 Title Hard disk error E602 -0500 Title Hard disk error Remedy Error due to data corruption or software bug. Remedy 1.
  • Page 728 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-43 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -0504 Title Hard disk error E602 -0513 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be 2.
  • Page 729 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-44 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -0522 Title Hard disk error E602 -0600 Title Hard disk error Remedy Error due to data corruption or software bug. Remedy 1.
  • Page 730 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-45 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -0604 Title Hard disk error E602 -0613 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be 2.
  • Page 731 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-46 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -0622 Title Hard disk error E602 -0700 Title Hard disk error Remedy Error due to data corruption or software bug. Remedy 1.
  • Page 732 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-47 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -0704 Title Hard disk error E602 -0713 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be 2.
  • Page 733 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-48 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -0722 Title Hard disk error E602 -0800 Title Hard disk error Remedy Error due to data corruption or software bug. Remedy 1.
  • Page 734 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-49 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -0804 Title Hard disk error E602 -0813 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be 2.
  • Page 735 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-50 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -0822 Title Hard disk error E602 -0900 Title Hard disk error Remedy Error due to data corruption or software bug. Remedy 1.
  • Page 736 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-51 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -0904 Title Hard disk error E602 -0912 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy Error due to data corruption or software bug.
  • Page 737 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-52 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -0921 Title Hard disk error E602 -0925 Title Hard disk error Remedy This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write Remedy The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be level.
  • Page 738 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-53 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -1003 Title Hard disk error E602 -1012 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to Remedy Error due to data corruption or software bug.
  • Page 739 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-54 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -1021 Title Hard disk error E602 -1025 Title Hard disk error Remedy This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write Remedy The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be level.
  • Page 740 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-55 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -1103 Title Hard disk error E602 -1111 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1. If possible, ask the customer to retrieve the data in the Remedy This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write Address Book from the remote UI.
  • Page 741 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-56 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -1115 Title Hard disk error E602 -1125 Title Hard disk error Remedy Error due to data corruption or software bug. Remedy The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be 1.
  • Page 742 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-57 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -1203 Title Hard disk error E602 -1211 Title Hard disk error Remedy Recovery of Boot partition must be executed in Safe Mode Remedy This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write using SST.
  • Page 743 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-58 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -1215 Title Hard disk error E602 -1225 Title Hard disk error Remedy Error due to data corruption or software bug. Remedy The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be 1.
  • Page 744 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-59 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -1303 Title Hard disk error E602 -1312 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to Remedy Error due to data corruption or software bug.
  • Page 745 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-60 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -1321 Title Hard disk error E602 -1325 Title Hard disk error Remedy This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write Remedy The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be level.
  • Page 746 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-61 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -1403 Title Hard disk error E602 -1412 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to Remedy Error due to data corruption or software bug.
  • Page 747 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-62 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -1421 Title Hard disk error E602 -1425 Title Hard disk error Remedy This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write Remedy The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be level.
  • Page 748 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-63 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -1503 Title Hard disk error E602 -1512 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to Remedy Error due to data corruption or software bug.
  • Page 749 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-64 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -1521 Title Hard disk error E602 -1525 Title Hard disk error Remedy This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write Remedy The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be level.
  • Page 750 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-65 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -1603 Title Hard disk error E602 -1612 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to Remedy Error due to data corruption or software bug.
  • Page 751 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-66 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -1621 Title Hard disk error E602 -1625 Title Hard disk error Remedy This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write Remedy The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be level.
  • Page 752 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-67 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -4000 Title OS startup error E602 -FF03 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1. Cable connection error. Remedy 1.
  • Page 753 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-68 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 -FF12 Title Hard disk error E602 -FF21 Title Hard disk error Remedy Error due to data corruption or software bug. Remedy This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write 1.
  • Page 754 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-69 Detail Location Item Description Code Code E602 -FF25 Title Hard disk error Remedy The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes);...

  • Page 755: E604 To E677

    Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E677 7-70 ■ E604 to E677 Detail Location Item Description Code Code Detail Location Item Description E610 -0202 Title Failure of the HDD encryption key (hardware configuration Code Code error/initialization error/encryption key error/encryption E604 -1024...
  • Page 756 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E677 7-71 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E611 -0000 Title Rebooting due to SRAM corruption when executing a E674 -0200 Title HDD access error transmission job that secures disconnection of the power Remedy...

  • Page 757: E710 To E760

    Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760 7-72 ■ E710 to E760 Detail Location Item Description Code Code Detail Location Item Description E711 -0040 Title IPC communication error (serial error) Code Code Remedy 1. Check the cable connection. E710 -0001 Title Printer IPC error...
  • Page 758 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760 7-73 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E717 -0001 Title Communication error with the NE Controller E719 -0012 Title IPC error at Card Reader operation Remedy Check the cable, and then go through the following to clear Remedy...
  • Page 759 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760 7-74 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E730 -9004 Title Third party PDL communication error E732 -0001 Title Reader communication error Remedy 1.
  • Page 760 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760 7-75 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E733 -0001 Title Communication error between the Main Controller PCB 1 and E733 -0010 Title Communication error between the Main Controller PCB 2 and the DC Controller PCB...
  • Page 761 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760 7-76 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E743 -0004 Title DDI communication error E746 -0022 Title Invalid Image Analysis PCB version Remedy 1.
  • Page 762 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760 7-77 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E746 -0033 Title Error in engine ID of SoftID E748 -2011 Title Flash board error Remedy When the TPM key was backed up, it can be restored.

  • Page 763: E804 To E996

    Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E996 7-78 ■ E804 to E996 Detail Location Item Description Code Code Detail E753 -0001 Title Download Error Location Item Description Code Code Remedy Check the log to find where the download error has been E804 -0000 Title Power Supply Cooling Fan 1/2 error...
  • Page 764 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E996 7-79 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E808 -0003 Title Fixing Power Supply error E808 -0008 Title Fixing Power Supply error Remedy 1.
  • Page 765 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E996 7-80 Detail Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E840 -0001 Title Fixing Shutter Motor error E905 -0003 Title POD Deck Air Assist Fan error Remedy 1.

  • Page 766: Jam Code

    Error Code > Jam Code > Jam Type 7-81 Jam Code Jam Type Jam types are shown below. Type Meaning DELAY Delay jam STNRY Stationary jam OVERLAP Double feed detection TIMING NG Timing error OHP NG Incorrect paper ADF OP ADF open COVER OP Cover open...

  • Page 767: Jam Type

    Error Code > Jam Code > Main Unit 7-82 Main Unit Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID Code 0101 DELAY Right Deck Pickup Sensor 1 PS19 PS52 PS20 PS67 PS29 PS28 PS64 0102 DELAY Right Deck Pull Out Sensor PS32 0103 DELAY Vertical Path Sensor 1 PS24...
  • Page 768 Error Code > Jam Code > Main Unit 7-83 Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID Code 0A0F POWER ON Fixing Inlet Sensor Power ON jam PS51 0A11 POWER ON Fixing Outlet Sesor PS52 0A12 POWER ON Inner Delivery Sensor PS35 0A13 POWER ON Outer Delivery Sensor PS36...
  • Page 769 Error Code > Jam Code > Duplex Color Image Reader-C1 7-84 Duplex Color Image Reader-C1 Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID Code 0051 DELAY Delivery sensor PCB5 SR20 SR22 SR17 PCB2 SR12 0052 STNRY Delivery sensor PCB5 PCB3 SR18 SR19 SR10 0071 TIMING NG TIMING NG...
  • Page 770 Error Code > Jam Code > Color Image Reader-C1 7-85 Color Image Reader-C1 Type Sensor Name / Description Sensor ID Code 0047 DELAY Lead sensor 1 PCB4 SR10 0048 STNRY Lead sensor 1 PCB4 SR12 SR23 SR22 PCB2 0049 DELAY Lead sensor 2 0050 STNRY...

  • Page 771: Paper Deck Unit-D1

    Error Code > Jam Code > Paper Deck Unit-A1 7-86 Paper Deck Unit-D1 Paper Deck Unit-A1 F-7-5 F-7-4 Type Sensor Name / Description Sensor ID Code 0117 DELAY Deck feed sensor Type Sensor Name / Description Sensor ID Code 0118 DELAY Deck pickup sensor 0117...

  • Page 772: Inserter-L1

    Error Code > Jam Code > Inserter-L1 7-87 Inserter-L1 ACC ID Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID Code 10B1 DELAY Paper Registration Sensor Delay jam 10B2 DELAY Reverse Inlet Sensor Delay jam 10B3 DELAY Reverse Sensor Delay jam 10B4 DELAY Reverse Timing Sensor Delay jam 11C1 STNRY Paper Registration Sensor Stationary jam...

  • Page 773: Paperfolding Inserter Unit-H1

    Error Code > Jam Code > PaperFolding Inserter Unit-H1 7-88 PaperFolding Inserter Unit-H1 Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID Code 10B1 DELAY Paper Registration Sensor Delay jam 10B2 DELAY Reverse Inlet Sensor Delay jam 10B3 DELAY Reverse Sensor Delay jam 10B4 DELAY Reverse Timing Sensor Delay jam 10B5...

  • Page 774: External 2-Hole Puncher-A1

    Error Code > Jam Code > External 2-hole Puncher-A1 7-89 External 2-hole Puncher-A1 Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID Code 1F44 PUNCH Punch home jam PI63 1F45 POWER ON Punch Residual jam LED5,PTR5 PI63 1012 DELAY Punch Path Sensor Feed Delay jam LED5, PTR5 LED5/ 1122...

  • Page 775: Staple Finisher-E1/Booklet Finisher-E1

    Error Code > Jam Code > Staple Finisher-E1/Booklet Finisher-E1 7-90 Staple Finisher-E1/Booklet Finisher-E1 ACC ID Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID Code 1011 DELAY Inlet Path Sensor Feed Delay jam PI103 1013 DELAY Escape Path Sensor Feed Delay jam PI118 1014 DELAY Delivery Path Sensor Feed Delay jam PI104 1091...

  • Page 776: Alarm Code

    Error Code > Alarm Code > List of Alarm Code 7-91 Alarm Code Alarm Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Code 04-0001 Right Deck Lifter error Movement: The Right Deck Lifter Motor (M4) is stopped. Not List of Alarm Code using the Right Deck.
  • Page 777 Error Code > Alarm Code > List of Alarm Code 7-92 Alarm Alarm Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Code Code 04-0003 Cassette 3 Lifter error Movement: The Cassette 3 Lifter Motor (M20) is stopped. Not 04-0008 Option Deck Lifter Movement: The Option Deck Pickup Motor (M) is stopped.
  • Page 778 Error Code > Alarm Code > List of Alarm Code 7-93 Alarm Alarm Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Code Code 04-0033 Cassette 3 Lifter Movement: The Cassette 3 Lifter Motor (M20) is stopped. Not 04-0071 Error in Cassette Movement: Jam occurred when picking up from the Cassette 3.
  • Page 779 Error Code > Alarm Code > List of Alarm Code 7-94 Alarm Alarm Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Code Code 04-0075 Error in Reverse Movement: Jam occurred at the time of large size paper 09-0009 Drum HP signal Movement: Only when the 2D shading is ON, the accuracy of...
  • Page 780 Error Code > Alarm Code > List of Alarm Code 7-95 Alarm Alarm Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Code Code 31-0008 HDD failure prediction Movement: HDD failure is expected to occur in a short time due 33-0001 Delivery Assembly Movement: No change.
  • Page 781 Error Code > Alarm Code > List of Alarm Code 7-96 Alarm Alarm Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Code Code 33-0026 Charging Assembly Movement: No change. 50-0008 Insufficient light Movement: Nothing in particular. Fan 1 alarm Cause: Connector disconnection of the Pre-transfer Charging intensity in Lead...
  • Page 782 XPS document data 78-0003 Invalid GL entry error 78-0005 System memory full 84-0005 XPS page data error 79-0001 Canon-made PCL PCL initialization error 84-0006 XPS image data error - 79-0002 Canon-made PCL PCL processing error 84-0007 XPS font data error...

  • Page 783: Service Mode

    Service Mode ■ Overview ■ COPIER ■ FEEDER ■ SORTER ■ BOARD Service Mode...

  • Page 784: Entering Service Mode

    Service Mode > Overview > Service mode item explanations Overview Service mode item explanations Explanatory texts for the initial window, main items, sub items and minor items can be Instructions on how to use service mode items can be found within the service mode itself. displayed.

  • Page 785: I/O Information Enhancement

    Service Mode > Overview > Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description I/O information enhancement Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description On the COPIER > I/O, the mode to confirm input output signal of electrical parts used (sensor, The detail description of each code can be viewed on the error code and alarm code motor, fan, etc), makes it easier to look for the intended electrical part.

  • Page 786: Copier > Option > Body, Item Segmentation

    Service Mode > Overview > COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation ALARM CODE : COPIER > DISPLAY >ERR On the current machine, there are extremely many items in the COPIER > OPTION > BODY (in related to host machine specification), that it is difficult to reach the intended item.

  • Page 787: Security Features

    Service Mode > Overview > Security features > Related service modes Security features 1) Additional Functions > System Settings > System Manager Settings > enter System Manager ID > enter System Password Settings > press OK button. To prevent unauthorized access to Service Mode, Password set is enabled. ■...

  • Page 788: Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2)

    Service Mode > Overview > Language switch Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2) Language switch Switching screens between level 1 and 2 has been made easier. The language of the explanatory text displayed in the Service Mode can be switched by When level 1 screen is displayed, press <LEVEL 1>...

  • Page 789: Back-Up Of Service Mode

    Service Mode > Overview > Back-up of service mode Back-up of service mode In factory setting, adjustments are made for each machine, and adjustment values are written in the service label. When you replaced the DC controller PCB, or executed the RAM clear function, adjustment values for ADJUST or OPTION return to default.

  • Page 790: Copier

    Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION SDL-STCH Dis of Saddle Sttch Ctrollr PCB ROM ver Lv.1 Details To display the ROM version of the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB. DISPLAY Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) ■...
  • Page 791 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION LANG-FR Display of French language file version LANG-FI Display of Finnish language file version Lv.1 Details To display the version of French language file. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Finnish language file.
  • Page 792 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-10 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION LANG-SV Display of Swedish language file version OCR-CN Display of Chinese OCR: simplified Lv.2 Details To display the version of Swedish language file. Lv.1 Details To display the version of Chinese OCR (simplified).
  • Page 793 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-11 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION TTS-FR Dis of French voice dictionary version TIMESTMP Display of timestamp version Lv.1 Details To display the version of French voice dictionary. Lv.1 Details To display the version of “Time Stamp”...
  • Page 794 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-12 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION MEDIA-FR Dis of French media information version MEDIA-HU Dis of Hungarian media information ver Lv.2 Details To display the version of French media information. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Hungarian media information.
  • Page 795 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-13 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION MEDIA-TW Dis of Chinese media info version:trad SYSTEM Dis of Linux kernel/tool/driver/file ver Lv.2 Details To display the version of Chinese media information (traditional). Lv.1 Details To display the version of Linux kernel/tool/driver/file.
  • Page 796 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-14 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION S-LNG-SP Dis of service mode Spanish file version TSP-JLK Dis of PCAM Option Board version Lv.1 Details To display the version of Spanish language file in service mode. Lv.1 Details To display the version of the PCAM Option Board.
  • Page 797 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-15 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPY-KO Dis of COPY appli Korean file version COPY-NL Dis of COPY appli Dutch file version Lv.2 Details To display the Korean language file version of COPY application Lv.2 Details To display the Dutch language file version of COPY application (JAVA (JAVA UI).
  • Page 798 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-16 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPY-ID Dis of COPY appli Indonesian file ver SEND-FR Dis of SEND appli French file version Lv.2 Details To display the Indonesian language file version of COPY application Lv.1 Details To display the French language file version of SEND application (JAVA (JAVA UI).
  • Page 799 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-17 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION SEND-CS Dis of SEND appli Czech file version SEND-NO Dis of SEND appli Norwegian file version Lv.2 Details To display the Czech language file version of SEND application (JAVA Lv.2 Details To display the Norwegian language file version of SEND application UI).
  • Page 800 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-18 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION SEND-BU Dis of SEND appli Bulgarian file version INTRO-IT Dis useful func intro Italian file ver Lv.2 Details To display the Bulgarian language file version of SEND application Lv.1 Details To display the version of Italian language file of Introduction to Useful (JAVA UI).
  • Page 801 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-19 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION INTRO-DA Dis of useful func intro Danish file ver INTRO-PL Dis of useful func intro Polish file ver Lv.2 Details To display the version of Danish language file of Introduction to Lv.2 Details To display the version of Polish language file of Introduction to Useful Useful Features application.
  • Page 802 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-20 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION INTRO-CR Dis useful func intro Croatian file ver CSTMN-DE Dis of custom menu German file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Croatian language file of Introduction to Lv.1 Details To display the version of German language file for custom menu Useful Features application.
  • Page 803 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-21 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION CSTMN-EL Dis of custom menu Greek file version CSTMN-PT Dis of custom menu Portuguese file ver Lv.2 Details To display the version of Greek language file for custom menu Lv.2 Details To display the version of Portuguese language file for custom menu application.
  • Page 804 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-22 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION CSTMN-RM Dis of custom menu Romanian file version ACSBT-ES Dis of accessibility Spanish file ver Lv.2 Details To display the version of Romanian language file for custom menu Lv.1 Details To display the version of Spanish language file for Accessibility application.
  • Page 805 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-23 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION ACSBT-ET Dis of accessibility Estonian file ver ACSBT-RU Dis of accessibility Russian file ver Lv.2 Details To display the version of Estonian language file for Accessibility Lv.2 Details To display the version of Russian language file for Accessibility application.
  • Page 806 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-24 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION ACSBT-SK Dis of accessibility Slovak file version ERS-TW Display of ERS Chinese file ver:trad Lv.2 Details To display the version of Slovak language file for Accessibility Lv.2 Details To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for ERS application.
  • Page 807 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-25 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION ERS-NL Display of ERS Dutch file version ERS-BU Display of ERS Bulgarian file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Dutch language file for ERS application. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Bulgarian language file for ERS application.
  • Page 808 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-26 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION NLS-DE Display of UAC German file version NLS-EL Display of UAC Greek file version Lv.1 Details To display the version of German language file for UAC application. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Greek language file for UAC application.
  • Page 809 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-27 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION NLS-PT Display of UAC Portuguese file ver NLS-RM Display of UAC Romanian file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Portuguese language file for UAC Lv.2 Details To display the version of Romanian language file for UAC application.
  • Page 810 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-28 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION BOX-FR Display of BOX appli French file version BOX-CS Display of BOX appli Czech file version Lv.1 Details To display the version of French language file for BOX application Lv.2 Details To display the version of Czech language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
  • Page 811 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-29 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION BOX-NO Dis of BOX appli Norwegian file version BOX-BU Dis of BOX appli Bulgarian file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Norwegian language file for BOX application Lv.2 Details To display the version of Bulgarian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).

  • Page 812: User

    Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS 8-30 ■ USER ■ ACC-STS COPIER > DISPLAY > USER COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS SPDTYPE Dis of Ctrollr Board engine speed type FEEDER Display of DADF connection state Lv.1 Details To display the engine speed type (ppm) of Controller Board. Lv.1 Details To display the connecting state of DADF.
  • Page 813 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS 8-31 COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS DATA-CON Dis of NE Controller connection state SEND Display of SEND support PCB existence Lv.1 Details To display the connecting state of NE Controller. Lv.1 Details To display whether there is PCB to support SEND function.

  • Page 814: Analog

    Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG 8-32 ■ ANALOG COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG FIX-SHTR Display of Fixing Shutter temperature COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG Lv.1 Details To display the temperature of the Fixing Shutter detected by the TEMP Display of inside temperature Fixing Shutter Thermistor.

  • Page 815: Cst-Sts

    Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS 8-33 ■ CST-STS ■ HV-STS COPIER > DISPLAY > CST-STS COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS WIDTH-C3 Display of Cassette 3 paper size PRIMARY Display of primary charging current Lv.2 Details To display the paper size of Cassette 3. Lv.1 Details To display the current that is applied to the Primacy Charging Assembly at the latest.

  • Page 816: Ccd

    Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD 8-34 ■ CCD COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS TR-LV-I Dis ppr lead edge trns bias output crrnt COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD Lv.1 Details To display the current value in the paper leading edge position at TARGET-B Shading target value (B) transfer bias output.
  • Page 817 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD 8-35 COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD GAIN-OR Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(R): frt LAMP-CL Scan Lamp intensity adj VL(color): frt Lv.2 Details To display the Red gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit Lv.2 Details To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper front).
  • Page 818 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD 8-36 COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD OFST2-BW Img Sensor offset value (B&W) [Back] GAIN2BW2 Img Sensor gain level adj VL2(B&W): Back Lv.2 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Lv.2 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-C1 only.
  • Page 819 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD 8-37 COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD GAIN2-OG Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(G): bck GAIN2-EG Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(G):bck Lv.2 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Lv.2 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-C1 only.

  • Page 820: Dpot

    Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT 8-38 ■ DPOT COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT PRIM-C Dis pry chg current potntl ctrl result COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT Lv.2 Details To display the potential control result of primary charging current. DPOT-K Display of Bk Drum surface potential Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)

  • Page 821: Sensor

    Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC 8-39 ■ SENSOR ■ MISC COPIER > DISPLAY > SENSOR COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC DOC-SZ Dis size detected by Original Size Sensr LPOWER Display of laser light intensity Lv.2 Details To display the original size detected by Original Size Sensor. Lv.2 Details To display the laser power setting value during image formation in real time.

  • Page 822: Envrnt

    Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > 2D-SHADE 8-40 ■ ENVRNT ■ 2D-SHADE COPIER > DISPLAY > 2D-SHADE Environment Indication 2D-STS Display of 2D shading ON/OFF The readings of the environment sensor and the fixing thermistor (main) are indicated as a Lv.1 Details To display ON/OFF of 2D shading.

  • Page 823: I/O (I/O Display Mode)

    Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) 8-41 I/O (I/O display mode) Address Name Symbol Remarks P003 15 Primary Charging Shutter Sensor PS94 1: HP front 14 Not used Address Name Symbol Remarks 13 For R&D use P001 15 Not used 12 For R&D use 14 Not used...
  • Page 824 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) 8-42 Address Name Symbol Remarks Address Name Symbol Remarks P004 15 Not used P005 15 Roller Bias OFF 0: OFF, 1: ON 14 Not used 14 Pre-transfer Charging PCB Remote PCB26 0: ON 13 Not used 13 Develop High Voltage PCB Remote PCB12...
  • Page 825 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) 8-43 Address Name Symbol Remarks Address Name Symbol Remarks P007 15 Shift Tray Rear Tray Full Sensor / PS104 0: Full P008 15 Fixing Power Supply Detection 1: iRA6075 Series Shift Tray Front Tray Full Sensor (rear) / 14 Not used PS105...
  • Page 826 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) 8-44 Address Name Symbol Remarks Address Name Symbol Remarks P009 15 5V sensor ON Signal (Fixing 1: ON P011 15 Developing Motor Error 1: Stop Assembly) 14 Drum Motor Error 1: Stop 14 Not used 13 Waste Toner Lock Detection Switch SW5 1: Lock (toner clogging) or...
  • Page 827 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) 8-45 Address Name Symbol Remarks Address Name Symbol Remarks P013 15 Not used P015 15 Right Deck Pickup Sensor 1/2 PS19 1: Paper presence 14 Not used 14 Right Deck Pickup Solenoid 0: Connect, 1: Not connect or Connection Driving...
  • Page 828 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) 8-46 Address Name Symbol Remarks Address Name Symbol Remarks P016 15 Cassette3 Lifter Motor Error 1: Error P017 15 Not used 14 Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 2 PS70 Detect paper level by combination 14 Not used of the Paper Level Sensor 1/2 13 Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1...
  • Page 829 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) 8-47 Address Name Symbol Remarks Address Name Symbol Remarks P019 15 Not used P020 15 Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 PS49 Detect paper level by combination of the Paper Level Sensor 1/2 14 Not used 0: OFF 13 Vertical Path Sensor 4...
  • Page 830 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) 8-48 Address Name Symbol Remarks Address Name Symbol Remarks P021 15 Not used P023 15 For R&D use 14 Not used 14 For R&D use 13 Not used 13 For R&D use 12 Not used 12 For R&D use 11 Feed Driver Cooling Fan Half Speed FM40...
  • Page 831 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) 8-49 Address Name Symbol Remarks Address Name Symbol Remarks P025 15 Not used P027 15 Transfer High Voltage PCB PCB13 0: Connect Connection 14 Not used 14 Not used 13 Not used 13 Transfer High Voltage PCB 24V PCB13 1: Error...

  • Page 832: Host Machine_Main Controller (Dc-Con>P001 To P005))

    Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_Main Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P005)) 8-50 ■ Host Machine_Main Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P005)) Address Name Symbol Remarks P029 15 Transfer High Voltage Positive Bias PCB13 0: ON Address Name Symbol Remarks Constant Current mode...

  • Page 833: Reader (R-Con>P001 To P005)

    Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Reader (R-CON>P001 to P005) 8-51 ■ Reader (R-CON>P001 to P005) Address Name Symbol Remarks P004 B_DDI_SPI1 Fix to 1 Address Name Symbol Remarks B_DDI_SCTS 0: Transmission is available P001 Scanner Unit HP Sensor 1: HP B_DDI_SPRDY 0: Engine ready...

  • Page 834: Adf (Feeder>P001 To P007)

    Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > ADF (FEEDER>P001 to P007) 8-52 ■ ADF (FEEDER>P001 to P007) Address Name Symbol Remarks P006 Glass Shift Motor Current 1: Operation is available Address Name Symbol Remarks Glass Shift Motor Direction 1: Shading direction (Right upper) P001 24V Power Supply Monitor...

  • Page 835: Paper Deck Uint - A1 (Sorter>P048 To P050)

    Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Deck Uint - A1 (SORTER>P048 to P050) 8-53 ■ Paper Deck Uint - A1 (SORTER>P048 to P050) Addres Description Symbol Remarks P050 15 for R&D Addres Description Symbol Remarks 14 not used P048 13 for R&D...

  • Page 836: Paper Deck Uint - D1 (Sorter>P048 To P050)

    Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Deck Uint - D1 (SORTER>P048 to P050) 8-54 ■ Paper Deck Uint - D1 (SORTER>P048 to P050) Addres Description Symbol Remarks P050 15 for R&D Addres Description Symbol Remarks 14 not used P048 13 for R&D...

  • Page 837: Inserter - L1 (Sorter>P047 To P061)

    Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter - L1 (SORTER>P047 to P061) 8-55 ■ Inserter - L1 (SORTER>P047 to P061) Address Name Symbol Remarks P052 Folding unit sensor H:No unit Address Name Symbol Remarks By Borah motor driver_standby signal - H:Movement is possible L:stop P047 Reserve unit motor*B...

  • Page 838: Paper Folding Inserter Unit - H1 (Sorter>P047 To P061)

    Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Folding Inserter Unit - H1 (SORTER>P047 to P061) 8-56 ■ Paper Folding Inserter Unit - H1 (SORTER>P047 to P061) Address Name Symbol Remarks P057 Address Name Symbol Remarks P047 Reserve unit motor*B H:active EEPROM/DA converter CLK signal...
  • Page 839 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Folding Inserter Unit - H1 (SORTER>P047 to P061) 8-57 Address Name Symbol Remarks Address Name Symbol Remarks P052 Folding unit sensor H:No unit P057 C fold stopper solenoid H:Absorption By Borah motor driver_standby signal H:Movement is possible C fold guide solenoid...

  • Page 840: External Punch - A1 (Sorter>Sorter>P041 To P046)

    Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > External Punch - A1 (SORTER>SORTER>P041 to P046) 8-58 ■ External Punch - A1 (SORTER>SORTER>P041 to P046) Addres Description Symbol Remarks P045 SW602 on the punch controller PCB 0:ON/1:OFF Addres Description Symbol Remarks SW603 on the punch controller PCB...

  • Page 841: Staple Finisher - E1 / Booklet Finisher -E1 (Sorter>P001 To P040)

    Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher - E1 / Booklet Finisher -E1 (SORTER>P001 to P040) 8-59 ■ Staple Finisher - E1 / Booklet Finisher -E1 (SORTER>P001 to Addres Description Symbol Remarks P006 not used P040) not used expansion I/O read signal...
  • Page 842 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher - E1 / Booklet Finisher -E1 (SORTER>P001 to P040) 8-60 Addres Description Symbol Remarks Addres Description Symbol Remarks P010 DIPSW1-8 on the finisher controller 0:ON/1:OFF P014 tray 1 shift motor enable signal M107 0:standby/1:drive tray 1 shift motor CW/CCW signal...
  • Page 843 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher - E1 / Booklet Finisher -E1 (SORTER>P001 to P040) 8-61 Addres Description Symbol Remarks Addres Description Symbol Remarks P017 tray 2 paper surface sensor 1 PI115 0:paper present/1:paper P021 puncher unit connection detection 0:connected/1:unconnected...
  • Page 844 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher - E1 / Booklet Finisher -E1 (SORTER>P001 to P040) 8-62 Addres Description Symbol Remarks Addres Description Symbol Remarks P026 not used P031 guide motor phase B signal not used guide motor phase A signal not used alignment motor B signal...
  • Page 845 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher - E1 / Booklet Finisher -E1 (SORTER>P001 to P040) 8-63 Addres Description Symbol Remarks Addres Description Symbol Remarks P036 not used P040 saddle inlet sensor PI22 0:paper absent/1:paper present feed plate contact solenoid 0:OFF/1:ON...

  • Page 846: Adjust

    Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY 8-64 ADJUST ■ ADJ-XY COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY ■ AE ADJ-X Adj of img pstn in book mode: vert scan Lv.1 Details To adjust the image reading start position (image leading edge COPIER >...

  • Page 847: Adj

    Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY 8-65 COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY ADJ-Y-DF Adj img pstn in DADF mode:horz scan[Frt] ADJY-DF2 Adj img pstn in DADF mode:horz scan[bck] Lv.1 Details To adjust the image reading start position in horizontal scanning Lv.1 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color direction at DADF reading.

  • Page 848: Ccd

    Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-66 ■ CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD SH-TRGT Shading target value (B&W) [Copyboard] COPIER > ADJUST > CCD Lv.1 Details To set the B&W shading target value in copyboard reading mode. W-PLT-X White level data(X) entry of white plate Use case...
  • Page 849 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-67 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD DFTAR-R Shading target value (R) [Front side] MTF2-M1 MTF value 1 setting: horz scan [Front] Lv.1 Details When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation.
  • Page 850 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-68 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD MTF2-M6 MTF value 6 setting: horz scan [Front] MTF2-S2 MTF value 2 setting: vert scan [Front] Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation.
  • Page 851 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-69 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD MTF2-S7 MTF value 7 setting: vert scan [Front] 100DF2RG Img Sensr RG color displace crrct VL:bck Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Lv.1 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
  • Page 852 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-70 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD DFCH2B10 Complex chart No.10 data(B) [Front side] CCD-CHNG Scanner Unit(ppr frt) rplce flag setting Lv.1 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Lv.1 Details To set the calculation mode of MTF filter coefficient that is used at Image Reader Unit-C1 only.
  • Page 853 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-71 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD MTF-M3 MTF value 3 setting: horz scan [Back] MTF-M7 MTF value 7 setting: horz scan [Back] Lv.1 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Lv.1 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-C1 only.
  • Page 854 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-72 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD MTF-S2 MTF value 2 setting: vert scan [Back] MTF-S6 MTF value 6 setting: vert scan [Back] Lv.1 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Lv.1 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-C1 only.
  • Page 855 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-73 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD DFCH-R2 Complex chart No.2 data (R) [Back side] DFCH-B10 Complex chart No.10 data (B) [Back side] Lv.1 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Lv.1 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-C1 only.
  • Page 856 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-74 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD MTF2-M10 MTF value 10 setting: horz scan [Front] MTF2-S12 MTF value 12 setting: vert scan [Front] Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation.
  • Page 857 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-75 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD MTF-S11 MTF value 11 setting: vert scan [Back] DFCH-K2 Complex chart No.2 data (B&W) [Back] Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Lv.1 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
  • Page 858 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-76 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD DFTBK-G Shading target value (G) [Back side] CCD-CHG2 Scanner Unit(paper back) rplce flag set Lv.1 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Lv.1 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-C1 only.

  • Page 859: Laser

    Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG 8-77 ■ LASER ■ IMG-REG COPIER > ADJUST > LASER COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG PVE-OFST Adj of write start position of laser MAG-H-K Fine adj of magnification: horz scan Lv.1 Details To adjust the image position by changing the laser emitting position.

  • Page 860: Develop

    Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS 8-78 ■ DEVELOP ■ DENS COPIER > ADJUST > DEVELOP COPIER > ADJUST > DENS BIAS Adjustment of developing bias DENS-ADJ Density correction of copy image Lv.1 Details To adjust the developing bias when the potential control is not Lv.1 Details To correct the density of copy image by changing the F-value table.

  • Page 861: Blank

    Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK 8-79 ■ BLANK COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK BLANK-B Adjustment of trailing edge margin COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK Lv.1 Details To adjust the margin on the trailing edge of paper. BLANK-T Adjustment of leading edge margin As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the Lv.1 Details...

  • Page 862: V-Cont

    Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT 8-80 ■ V-CONT COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT VD-OFST Dark area tgt potential ofst VL entry COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT Lv.1 Details To set the offset auto adjustment value of dark area target potential EPOTOFST Manual entry of Potential Sensor offset VL manually.

  • Page 863: Pascal

    Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI 8-81 ■ PASCAL ■ HV-PRI COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI OFST-P-K Bk density adj at test print reading PRIMARY Adjustment of primary charging current Lv.1 Details To adjust the offset of Bk color test print reading signal at Auto Adjust Lv.1 Details To adjust the primary charging current flows to the Primary Charging Gradation (Full Adjust).
  • Page 864 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-82 ■ HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR TR-OFS2 Adj transfer tgt current offset:Heavy 1 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset value of the target current of the Transfer Roller TR-OFS1 Adj transfer target current offset:Plain for heavy paper 1.
  • Page 865 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-83 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR TR-OFS3 Adj transfer tgt current offset:Heavy 2 TR-OFS4 Adj transfer tgt current offset: Thin Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset value of the target current of the Transfer Roller Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset value of the target current of the Transfer Roller for heavy paper 2.
  • Page 866 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-84 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR TR-OFS5 Adj transfer tgt current offset:Special1 TR-OFS6 Adj transfer tgt current offset:Special2 Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset value of the target current of the Transfer Roller Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset value of the target current of the Transfer Roller for special paper 1.
  • Page 867 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-85 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR TR-L-OF3 Adj lead edge trns tgt crrnt ofst:Heavy2 P-TR-OF1 Adj of pre-trn charge crrnt ofst: Plain Lv.2 Details To adjust the leading edge transfer target current and the offset value Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset value of the pre-transfer charging current for of leading edge transfer bias output timing for heavy paper 2.
  • Page 868 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-86 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR P-TR-OF2 Adj of pre-trn charge crrnt ofst:Heavy1 P-TR-OF3 Adj of pre-trn charge crrnt ofst:Heavy2 Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset value of the pre-transfer charging current for Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset value of the pre-transfer charging current for heavy paper 1.
  • Page 869 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-87 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR P-TR-OF4 Adj of pre-trn charge crrnt ofst: Thin P-TR-OF5 Adj pre-trn charge crrnt ofst: Special 1 Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset value of the pre-transfer charging current for thin Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset value of the pre-transfer charging current for paper.
  • Page 870 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-88 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR P-TR-OF6 Adj pre-trn charge crrnt ofst: Special 2 TR-SP2 Set trns tgt crrnt adj: special paper 2 Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset value of the pre-transfer charging current for Lv.2 Details To set the paper type of special paper 2 which the offset value of the special paper 2.

  • Page 871: Feed-Adj

    Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ 8-89 ■ FEED-ADJ COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR P-TR-SP1 Set pre-trns charging crrnt adj: Spcl 1 COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ Lv.2 Details To set the paper type of special paper 1 which the offset value of the REGIST Adj of registration start timing: Plain pre-transfer charging current is adjusted.
  • Page 872 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ 8-90 COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ ADJ-C2 Left Deck write start pstn in horz scan ADJ-C4 Cassette 4 write start pstn in horz scan Lv.1 Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning Lv.1 Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Left Deck.
  • Page 873 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ 8-91 COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ ADJ-DK Write start pstn in horz scan:Deck/POD D REG-THCK Rgst start timing adj: Heavy, 1/2 speed Lv.1 Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning Lv.1 Details To adjust the top margin by changing the timing to turn ON the direction when feeding paper from the Paper Deck/ POD Deck Lite.
  • Page 874 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ 8-92 COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ REG-DUP2 Rgst start timing adj: Heavy, 2nd side LP-MULT1 MP Tray pre-rgst arch amount: Plain Lv.1 Details To adjust the top margin by changing the timing to turn ON the Lv.1 Details To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding plain Registration Motor when feeding the second side of heavy paper.

  • Page 875: Cst-Adj

    Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ 8-93 ■ CST-ADJ COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ LP-DUP2 Duplex pre-rgst arch amount:Hvy/Transp COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ Lv.1 Details To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding heavy MF-A4R Adj of MP Tray A4R paper width paper/transparency in duplex mode.

  • Page 876: Misc

    Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC 8-94 ■ MISC COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ MF-A4 Adj of MP Tray A4 paper width COPIER > ADJUST > MISC Lv.1 Details To adjust the width of A4 paper in the Multi-purpose Tray. SEG-ADJ Set criteria for text/photo: front side When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the...
  • Page 877 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC 8-95 COPIER > ADJUST > MISC COPIER > ADJUST > MISC ACS-CNT Set jdgmt pixel count area in ACS:front WT-FL-LM Set of waste toner full dis timing Lv.2 Details To set the area which counts the pixel to judge the color presence in Lv.1 Details If the user sets the darker/lighter copy density than the normal ACS mode.
  • Page 878 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC 8-96 COPIER > ADJUST > MISC COPIER > ADJUST > MISC ACS-ADJ3 Set ACS B&W/color jdgmt stdrd:back side TBSIS-WB Setting of blank band ejection time Lv.1 Details To set the judgment level of B&W/color original in ACS mode (back Lv.2 Details To set the blank band ejection time.

  • Page 879: Exp-Led

    Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED 8-97 ■ EXP-LED COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED PR-EXP Setting of Pre-exposure LED current Lv.2 Details To set the current of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED. Increase the value when taking a measure for drum ghost. Decrease the value when potential is not applied well.

  • Page 880: Function

    Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL 8-98 FUNCTION COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL CARD Card number setting ■ INSTALL Lv.1 Details To set the card number to be used for Card Reader. A series of numbers from the entered number to the number of cards COPIER >...
  • Page 881 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL 8-99 COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL COM-TEST Disp connect result w/ Sales Co’s server CNT-DATE Set counter send start date to SC server Lv.1 Details To display the result of the connection test with the sales company’s Lv.1 Details To set the year, month, date, hour and minute to send counter server.

  • Page 882: Ccd

    Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD 8-100 ■ CCD COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL BRWS-ACT ON/OFF of service browser COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD Lv.1 Details To set ON/OFF of service browser. DF-WLVL1 White level adj in book mode: color ON/OFF of service browser switches whenever the main power Lv.1 Details To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by...

  • Page 883: Dpc

    Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC 8-101 ■ DPC COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD MTF-CLC Deriving of MTF filter coefficient COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC Lv.1 Details To derive the MTF filter coefficient to be set for ASIC based on the Execution of potential control MTF value of the DADF complex chart.

  • Page 884: Cst

    Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CST 8-102 ■ CST COPIER > FUNCTION > CST C4-A4R Reg Cassette 4 A4R stdrd width COPIER > FUNCTION > CST Lv.1 Details To register the standard value of A4R paper width (210 mm) on the C3-STMTR Reg Cassette 3 STMTR stdrd width Cassette 4.

  • Page 885: Cleaning

    Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING 8-103 ■ CLEANING ■ FIXING COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING TBLT-CLN ETB cleaning NIP-CHK Check of fixing nip width Lv.1 Details To execute three idle rotations of the ETB and clean the ETB. Lv.1 Details To check whether the fixing nip width is appropriate by printing.

  • Page 886: Panel

    Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK 8-104 ■ PANEL ■ PART-CHK COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK LCD-CHK Check of LCD Panel dot missing Specification of operation Clutch Lv.1 Details To check whether there is a missing dot on the LCD Panel of the Lv.1 Details To specify the Clutch to operate.

  • Page 887: Clear

    Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR 8-105 ■ CLEAR COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK MTR-ON Operation check of Motor COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR Lv.1 Details To start operation check of the Motor specified by MTR. Clear of error code The operation automatically stops after operation of 20 seconds.
  • Page 888 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR 8-106 COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR ADRS-BK Clear of address book MN-CON RAM clear of MNCON PCB SRAM Board Lv.1 Details To clear the address book data. Lv.1 Details To clear the RAM data of the Main Controller PCB SRAM Board.
  • Page 889 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR 8-107 COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR CA-KEY Deletion of CA certificate and key pair KEY-CLR Encrypt key clear of HDD Encrypt Board Lv.2 Details To simultaneously delete the CA certificate and key pair which are Lv.2 Details To clear the encryption key of the HDD Encryption Board (Security additionally registered by the user.

  • Page 890: Misc-R

    Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R 8-108 ■ MISC-R COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R CLM-DF1 Sampling of clr front stream read MTF VL COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R Lv.1 Details The MTF value for the Reader Unit is sometimes displaced from the SCANLAMP Light-up check of LED factory setting value depending on the condition at transportation/...
  • Page 891 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R 8-109 COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R CLM-DF2 Sampling color back stream read MTF VL CLPLT-EN Color copyboard read MTF VL initial set Lv.1 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Lv.1 Details To return the MTF value for color copyboard reading to the factory Image Reader Unit-C1only.
  • Page 892 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R 8-110 COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R CLDF1-EN Clr front stream read MTF VL initial set CLDF2-EN Clr back stream read MTF VL initial set Lv.1 Details To return the MTF value for color front side stream reading to the Lv.1 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color factory setting value.
  • Page 893 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R 8-111 COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R CLM-TGT Fine adjustment of color MTF value RD-SHPOS Moving to Reader Scanner Unit fix pstn Lv.1 Details To perform the filter processing inside of the Reader Controller so Lv.2 Details To move the Reader Scanner Unit to the position where it is fixed that the MTF value measured by CLM-PLTN/CLM-DF1/CLM-DF2...

  • Page 894: Misc-P

    Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P 8-112 ■ MISC-P COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P ENV-PRT Temp&hmdy/surface temp of Fix Roll log COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P Lv.1 Details To output data of the temperature and humidity inside the machine/ P-PRINT Output of service mode setting value surface temperature of the Fixing Roller as a log.

  • Page 895: Sens-Adj

    Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SENS-ADJ 8-113 ■ SENS-ADJ COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P Toner forcible eject (black band) COPIER > FUNCTION > SENS-ADJ Lv.1 Details Forcibly discharge low-charge toner, and send it to the drum cleaner STCK-LMT Adj of Shift Tray Full Sensor position unit.

  • Page 896: System

    Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM 8-114 ■ SYSTEM COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM HD-CLEAR Initialization of specified partition COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM Lv.1 Details To initialize the HDD partition specified by CHK-TYPE. DOWNLOAD Shift to download mode Use case When initializing the HDD partition Lv.1 Details...

  • Page 897: Shade

    Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > 2D-SHADE 8-115 ■ 2D-SHADE COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Backup of Reader Controller PCB SRAM COPIER > FUNCTION > 2D-SHADE Lv.2 Details To back up the setting data in SRAM of the Reader Controller PCB. M-LINE1 2D shading horizontal scan 1 correction Use case...
  • Page 898 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > 2D-SHADE 8-116 COPIER > FUNCTION > 2D-SHADE SHD-P1 2D shading pattern 1 output Lv.1 Details To output pattern 1 for 2D shading. Use case When checking 2D shading profile visually and entering manually Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.

  • Page 899: Fnc-Sw

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-117 OPTION COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW MODEL-SZ Fixed magnifictn & DADF orgnl dtct size ■ FNC-SW Lv.1 Details To set the fixed magnification ratio display and the original detection size with DADF. COPIER >...
  • Page 900 Uruguay, VE: Venezuela, VN: Vietnam 0: LETTER, 1: EXECUTIVE, 2: Argentine LETTER, 3: Government YY: Language (Fixed; e.g. ja: Japanese) LETTER ZZ: Location (Fixed; e.g. 00: CANON) Default value AA: Paper size configuration (00: AB configuration, 01: Inch ORG-B5 Special paper size set in DADF mode: B5 configuration, 02: A configuration, 03: Inch/AB configuration) Lv.2 Details...
  • Page 901 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-119 COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW MODELSZ2 Ppr size dtct global support in bookmode SC-L-CNT Set large paper jdgmt reference at scan Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF for global support of document size detection in Lv.1 Details To set the judgment reference of the scan counter as to which to use copyboard reading mode.
  • Page 902 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-120 COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW REBOOTSW Restart setting at E240 error occurrence CARD-RNG Card number setting (department number) Lv.2 Details To set whether to reboot in the case of E240 error. Lv.2 Details To set the number of cards (departments) that can be used with the In the case of E240 error, the machine is automatically rebooted due...
  • Page 903 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-121 COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW UNLMTBND Over 400 binders print job support set ILSZ-JAM ON/OFF of size difference jam detection Lv.1 Details To set whether to support print job that exceeds 400 binders. Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of size difference jam detection.
  • Page 904 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-122 COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW CE/SCNR Dis/set scan connector disconnect times INVALPDL Disable of PDL license Lv.1 Details To display/change the number of Scanner connector disconnection Lv.1 Details To disable the registered PDL license.
  • Page 905 Be sure to get approval from the user by telling that third party other 0: Approx. 900 sheets, 1: Approx. 140 sheets (A4, 5% image ratio) than Canon cannot recover the original document and image from Default value UDI log.
  • Page 906 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-124 COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW FAX-INT Set FAX RX print interruption oprtn mode MIB-NVTA RFC-compatible character stringMIB write Lv.2 Details To set the mode performing interruption operation of FAX reception Lv.1 Details As default, MIB object which NVT-ASCII can be written exists in print automatically.

  • Page 907: Dsply-Sw

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW 8-125 ■ DSPLY-SW COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW MEAP-DSP Screen switch set from MEAP to standard COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW Lv.2 Details To set to enable/disable switching from MEAP screen to the standard UI-COPY Display/hide of copy screen screen (COPY/SEND/Mail Box screen, etc).
  • Page 908 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW 8-126 COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW IMGC-ADJ Dis/hide of img adj item in user mode UI-HOLD Display/hide of hold job screen Lv.1 Details To set whether to display or hide the item relating to image Lv.2 Details To set whether to display the hold job screen on the Control Panel.
  • Page 909 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW 8-127 COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW RMT-CNSL ON/OFF of MEAP console screen UI-MOBP Display/hide of mobile print Lv.1 Details Selecting “1: ON” enables to obtain log for Function Composer on Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide “Mobile Print”...

  • Page 910: Img-Fix

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX 8-128 ■ IMG-FIX COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX CBLTINVL Setting of Fixing Web Solenoid ON times COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX Lv.1 Details To set frequency to turn ON the Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid. FIX-CLN Set fixing cleaning execution interval If an image failure occurs due to the soiled Pressure Roller, set 1.
  • Page 911 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX 8-129 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX TMP-TBL5 Set fixing control temp table: Transp FIX-DWN Set prdctvty reduct mode: small size Lv.1 Details To set the control temperature table of the Fixing Roller for Lv.2 Details To set the speed ratio in the case of reducing productivity when Transparency.
  • Page 912 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX 8-130 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX FIX-TMP3 Set fixing/productivity: Spcl ppr A3+ FX-WNKL Setting of paper wrinkle prevention mode Lv.1 Details To set priority between productivity and fixing by changing Lv.2 Details To set paper wrinkle prevention mode.

  • Page 913: Img-Dev

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV 8-131 ■ IMG-DEV COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV Set of highland ev voltg reduction mode COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV Lv.2 Details To set the highland environment voltage reduction mode in the case TSPLY-SW [Not used] that leak occurs at a high latitude.
  • Page 914 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV 8-132 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV BB-CNT Set Bk band output intvl: Cleaning Blade TBLTCLSW Setting of ETB cleaning timing Lv.1 Details To set the paper interval to output black band for preventing flip of Lv.1 Details To set the timing to execute ETB cleaning control.
  • Page 915 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV 8-133 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV TBLTTMS Set ETB cleaning bias application times MIB-NVTA RFC-compatible character stringMIB write Lv.1 Details To set the number of times to apply cleaning bias at the time of ETB Lv.1 Details As default, MIB object which NVT-ASCII can be written exists in cleaning.

  • Page 916: Img-Lsr

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR 8-134 ■ IMG-LSR ■ IMG-RDR COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR LAPC-SW ON/OFF of ini rotn/last rotn APC crrct DF-BLINE ON/OFF of dust dtct in DADF stream read Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of laser APC correction executed at initial rotation Lv.2 Details...
  • Page 917 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR 8-135 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR DFDST-L2 DADF mode dust dtct level adj: after job ABC-MD2 Adj back digital ABC bckgd dens reduct Lv.1 Details To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control Lv.1 Details To adjust the background density reduction setting level of back side that is executed after the job is completed in DADF mode.

  • Page 918: Img-Mcon

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON 8-136 ■ IMG-MCON COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR DF2DSTL2 Adj DADF dust dtct level at job end:bck COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON Lv.1 Details To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control PASCAL Use/no use of auto gradation adj data that is executed by the Scanner Unit (paper back) after the job is...
  • Page 919 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON 8-137 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON SCR-SLCT Halftone process in Photo Printout mode VP-ART Setting of line art processing Lv.2 Details To set halftone process (error diffusion, screen 2 types) in Photo Lv.2 Details To set outline processing for line art on scalable PDF.
  • Page 920 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON 8-138 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON C-S-P-D High dens end edge crrct: PDL dens prrty WDREDUCT Setting of white dots reduction mode Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of high density trailing edge correction function at Lv.1 Details To set the white dots reduction mode.

  • Page 921: Cleaning

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING 8-139 ■ CLEANING COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING CLN-ADJ Set black band length for cleaning COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING Lv.1 Details To set black band length for cleaning. W-CLN-P Set last rotn Prmry Charge Wir cln intvl When setting CLN-SW to 2 and setting CLN-ADJ to 0, the setting Lv.2 Details To set the offset value of the paper interval for automatic cleaning of...

  • Page 922: Env-Set

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW 8-140 ■ ENV-SET ■ FEED-SW COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW ENVP-INT Temp, humid/Fix Roll temp log get cycle TRY-CHG Set of Delivery Tray switch at tray full Lv.1 Details To set the cycle to obtain log of the temperature and humidity inside Lv.2 Details...
  • Page 923 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW 8-141 COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW DK2-TURN ON/OFF of L-Deck Pckup Rol little rotn DK3-TURN ON/OFF of Casstt3 Pckup Rol little rotn Lv.1 Details To set whether to rotate the Left Deck Pickup Roller a little after Lv.1 Details To set whether to rotate the Cassette 3 Pickup Roller a little after completion of job or at the time of warm-up rotation.
  • Page 924 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW 8-142 COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW DK4-TURN ON/OFF of Casstt4 Pckup Rol little rotn DK1-TURN ON/OFF of R-Deck Pckup Rol little rotn Lv.1 Details To set whether to rotate the Cassette 4 Pickup Roller a little after Lv.1 Details To set whether to rotate the Right Deck Pickup Roller a little after completion of job or at the time of warm-up rotation.

  • Page 925: Network

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-143 ■ NETWORK COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW DK5-TURN ON/OFF of OP-Deck Pckup Rol little rotn COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK Lv.1 Details To set whether to rotate the Option Deck Pickup Roller a little after RAW-DATA Setting of received data print mode completion of job or at the time of warm-up rotation.
  • Page 926 T.O.T: TUIF over TCP. Communication protocol to be used for Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535 communication with the built-in application (UI) and the internal Default value application such as COPY/ SEND/ BOX, etc. (Canon’s own protocol). FTPTXPN Specification of SEND port (FTP) number CMD-PORT ON/OFF TOTasync command comctn port Lv.1 Details...
  • Page 927 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-145 COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK NS-GSAPI Limit GSSAPI auth method at SMTP auth NS-PLN Limit plaintext auth at SMTPauth noencry Lv.2 Details To restrict use of GSSAPI authentication method at the time of SMTP Lv.2 Details To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext, at authentication.
  • Page 928 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-146 COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK SSH-SW ON/OFF of SSH server function U-NAME Setting of SSH server login user name Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of SSH server function. Lv.2 Details To set the login user name which enables to connect to the SSH server.
  • Page 929 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-147 COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK DA-CNCT Connection setting of WPGW LPD-PORT Setting of LPD port number Lv.2 Details To set WPGW connection. Lv.2 Details To set the LPD port number. Use case This mode is used for the Japanese models only.
  • Page 930 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-148 COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK WUEV-RTR Setting of sleep notification range DHCP-81 ON/OFF IPaddress dynamic chng in DHCP-81 Lv.2 Details To set the number of available routers to the target for sleep Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF for dynamic change of IP address by Option 81 of notification.
  • Page 931 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-149 COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK DNSTRANS Setting of DNS transfer priority 802XTOUT Set of IEEE802.1X authentication timeout Lv.1 Details To set priority order of the protocol (IPv4/IPv6) to be used for DNS Lv.1 Details To set timeout value for IEEE802.1X authentication.
  • Page 932 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-150 COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK IKEINTVL Setting of IKE retry interval AFS-JOB Set of FAX server job reception port Lv.1 Details To set retry interval in the case of no response from the Lv.1 Details To set the reception port of the fax server to which a fax client sends communication target at the time of IKE packet transmission.
  • Page 933 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-151 COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK IPTBROAD Set to allow broad/multicast TX IPMTU Setting of MTU size Lv.1 Details To set whether to permit transmission of broadcast packets and Lv.1 Details To set MTU size of network packet.

  • Page 934: Custom

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM 8-152 ■ CUSTOM COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM BOX-BKUP Set to allow Inbox backup data restore COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM Lv.1 Details To set whether to permit restoration of Inbox backup data. TEMP-TBL Set fixing control temp table: Plain Machine subject to restoration can be selected from either the same...
  • Page 935 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM 8-153 COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM DEV-SP1 Device special settings 1 DEV-SP5 Device special settings 5 Lv.2 Details To execute the device special settings 1. Lv.2 Details To execute the device special settings 5.
  • Page 936 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM 8-154 COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM AC-FREQ Setting of frequency of AC power Lv.2 Details Although power frequency is judged for power control with the machine, it might be judged incorrectly depending on power circumstance at the installation location.

  • Page 937: User

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER 8-155 ■ USER COPIER > OPTION > USER COUNTER3 Setting of software counter 3 COPIER > OPTION > USER Lv.1 Details To set counter type for software counter 3 on the Counter Check COPY-LIM Setting of upper limit for copy screen.
  • Page 938 Lv.1 Details To set charge count transmission of PDL job to the connecting Related user mode Copy > Options charging management device (Coin Manager or non-Canon-made control card). Supplement/memo Up to 630mm length paper is supported when DADF is used.
  • Page 939 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER 8-157 COPIER > OPTION > USER COPIER > OPTION > USER COPY-JOB Setting of copy job reservation JOB-INVL Job intvl setting at interruption copy Lv.1 Details To set to enable/disable copy job reservation when the Card Reader/ Lv.2 Details To set output interval between jobs at the time of interruption copy.
  • Page 940 Collate mode, as bind figure while the value of COPIES command Be sure to comply the above; otherwise, proper print is not available for the next page or later is invalid. Same control applies as Canon- and it can cause soil inside the machine because of toner.
  • Page 941 0: No transmission, 1: Transmission Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Default value 0: Retained, 1: Deleted Supplement/memo Charging management device: Coin Manager, Non-Canon-made Default value control card FREG-SW Dis/hide of MEAP counter free rgst area DOC-REM Dis/hide of original removal message Lv.2 Details...
  • Page 942 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER 8-160 COPIER > OPTION > USER COPIER > OPTION > USER IFAX-SZL Setting of IFAX send size limit MEAPSAFE Setting of MEAP safe mode Lv.2 Details To set for restricting data size at the time of IFAX transmission that Lv.2 Details To set safe mode for MEAP platform.
  • Page 943 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER 8-161 COPIER > OPTION > USER COPIER > OPTION > USER SLP-SLCT Usage setting of network applications CNCT-RLZ Setting of connection serialize function Lv.2 Details With the setting to use network-related application, the machine can Lv.2 Details Connection serialize is a function to assure job grouping function of be recovered through network because it does not move to sleep...
  • Page 944 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER 8-162 COPIER > OPTION > USER COPIER > OPTION > USER JA-RESTR Setting of job archive limit items DOM-ADD Additional entry of mail destn domain Lv.2 Details To set restriction items for job archive specification. Lv.2 Details To set to automatically add the domain specified in user mode to the With job archive function enabled, follow the setting to execute...
  • Page 945 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER 8-163 COPIER > OPTION > USER COPIER > OPTION > USER MAIL-OF Mail send prohibition to entered address FREE-DSP Display/hide of charge disable screen Lv.1 Details To set to prohibit address entry at the time of e-mail transmission. Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide the Use Charge Management E-mail transmission is not available by entering the address because...
  • Page 946 SNMP community name that is specified in SCALLCMP Set of repair request complete notice user mode. Canon-made utility software, such as NetSpot, uses this Lv.1 Details With this setting enabled, a notification of repair completion is sent community name.
  • Page 947 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER 8-165 COPIER > OPTION > USER COPIER > OPTION > USER USBH-DSP Display/hide of “Use USB Host” CTCHKDSP Display/hide of counter print Lv.2 Details To set whether to display “Preferences > External Interface > USB Lv.1 Details To set whether to display or hide “Print List”...
  • Page 948 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER 8-166 COPIER > OPTION > USER COPIER > OPTION > USER POL-SCAN Dis/hide of Rights Management Server set W-TN-DSP [Not used] Lv.1 Details When “1: Display” is set, the Rights Management Server function Lv.1 Details screen is displayed.
  • Page 949 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER 8-167 COPIER > OPTION > USER COPIER > OPTION > USER JA-BOX Setting of Inbox document operation: SAM JA-JDF Setting of JDF: SAM Lv.2 Details To set the operation for Inbox document at the time of iW SAM Lv.2 Details To set the use of JDF when iW SAM is enabled.

  • Page 950: Cst

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST 8-168 ■ CST COPIER > OPTION > USER SLEEP1SW Power supply when shifting to SLEEP1 COPIER > OPTION > CST Lv.1 Details When shifting to SLEEP1 mode, the power stops to be supplied, so it U1-NAME Dis/hide of ppr name in ppr size groupU1 takes time to activate after a job is received.
  • Page 951 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST 8-169 COPIER > OPTION > CST COPIER > OPTION > CST P-SZ-C1 Setting of Right Deck paper size CST4-P1 Setting of Cassette 4 paper size Lv.1 Details To set the paper size used in the Right Deck. Lv.1 Details To set the paper size used in Cassette 4.

  • Page 952: Acc

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ACC 8-170 ■ ACC COPIER > OPTION > CST CST4-U1 Set Cst4 overseas special ppr category 1 COPIER > OPTION > ACC Lv.1 Details To set the overseas special paper category 1 used in Cassette 4. COIN Setting of charge management Use case...
  • Page 953 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ACC 8-171 COPIER > OPTION > ACC COPIER > OPTION > ACC PD-SIZE Setting of Side Paper Deck paper size MIN-PRC Set of Coin Manager minimum price Lv.1 Details To set the paper size used in the Side Paper Deck. Lv.1 Details To set the minimum amount to be handled with Coin Manager.
  • Page 954 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ACC 8-172 COPIER > OPTION > ACC COPIER > OPTION > ACC MIC-TUN Manual adj of voice recognize microphone CR-TYPE Setting of Card Reader Lv.1 Details To manually adjust the voice receiving level (sensitivity) of the Lv.1 Details To set the model of the Card Reader.

  • Page 955: Int-Face

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE 8-173 ■ INT-FACE COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE CNT-TYPE Connection setting of print server COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE Lv.1 Details To switch print server to be connected. IMG-CONT Connection setting of print server Specify print server with EFI Controller ID.

  • Page 956: Tempo

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR 8-174 ■ TEMPO ■ LCNS-TR COPIER > OPTION > TEMPO COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR F-POT-SW [Not used] ST-SEND Installation state dis of SEND function Lv.2 Details Lv.2 Details To display installation state of SEND function when transfer is disabled.
  • Page 957 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR 8-175 COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR ST-SPDF Installation state dis of Searchable PDF ST-PDFDR Install state dis of Direct Print PDF Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Searchable PDF when transfer is Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Direct Print PDF when transfer is disabled.
  • Page 958 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR 8-176 COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR ST-HDCLR Installation state display of Data Erase ST-VNC Install state dis of Remote Oprtr Soft Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Data Erase (for old model) when Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Remote Operators Software when transfer is disabled.
  • Page 959 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR 8-177 COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR ST-HRPDF Install state dis of High Compress PDF ST-WTMRK Install state dis of Secure Watermark Lv.2 Details To display installation state of High Compression PDF when transfer Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Secure Watermark when transfer is is disabled.
  • Page 960 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR 8-178 COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR ST-USPDF Install state dis of Dgtl User Sign PDF ST-SCPDF Install state dis of Trace & Smooth PDF Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Digital User Signature PDF when Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Trace &...
  • Page 961 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR 8-179 COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR ST-ERDS Install state dis: E-RDS 3rd Pty Expnsn ST-PCL Install state display of PCL function Lv.2 Details To display installation state of E-RDS 3rd Party Expansion when Lv.2 Details To display installation state of PCL function when transfer is disabled.
  • Page 962 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR 8-180 COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR ST-LIPS5 Install state dis:LIPS LX/LIPS4 func: JP ST-PSPCL Install state dis of PS/PCL function Lv.2 Details To display installation state of LIPS LX/LIPS4 function (JP only) when Lv.2 Details To display installation state of PS/PCL function when transfer is transfer is disabled.
  • Page 963 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR 8-181 COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR ST-PSLIP Install state dis of PS/LIPS4 func: JP ST-LXUFR Install state dis of UFR II function Lv.2 Details To display installation state of PS/LIPS4 function (JP only) when Lv.2 Details To display installation state of UFR II function when transfer is transfer is disabled.
  • Page 964 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR 8-182 COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR ST-MOBIL Install state dis of Mobile Link func:JP ST-AFAX Installation state dis of Remote Fax Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Mobile Link function (JP only) when Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Remote Fax when transfer is disabled.
  • Page 965 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR 8-183 COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR ST-REPDF Install state dis:Reader Extensions PDF ST-XPS Install state dis of Direct Print XPS Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Reader Extensions PDF when transfer Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Direct Print XPS when transfer is is disabled.

  • Page 966: Test

    Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > PG 8-184 TEST COPIER > TEST > PG TXPH Setting of test print image mode ■ PG Lv.1 Details To set the image mode at the time of test print output. This mode is enabled for test print only. COPIER >...

  • Page 967: Network

    Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NETWORK 8-185 ■ NETWORK COPIER > TEST > PG FINISH Accessory processing function test print COPIER > TEST > NETWORK Lv.1 Details To execute the test print relating to accessory processing function. PING Network connection check Use case When checking operation of accessory processing function...
  • Page 968 Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NETWORK 8-186 COPIER > TEST > NETWORK PING-IP6 PING transmission to IPv6 address Lv.1 Details To send PING to the address specified by IPV6-ADR. The network connection condition in the IPv6 environment can be checked.

  • Page 969: Counter

    Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL 8-187 COUNTER COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL RPT-PRT Report print counter ■ TOTAL Lv.1 Details To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at report print. COPIER >...

  • Page 970: Pick-Up

    Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > FEEDER 8-188 ■ PICK-UP ■ FEEDER COPIER > COUNTER > PICK-UP COPIER > COUNTER > FEEDER Cassette 1 pickup total counter FEED DADF original pickup total counter Lv.1 Details Small size: 1 Lv.1 Use case When checking the total counter of original pickup by DADF Unit Number of sheets...

  • Page 971: Jam

    Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > MISC 8-189 ■ JAM ■ MISC COPIER > COUNTER > JAM COPIER > COUNTER > MISC TOTAL Host machine total jam counter FIX-WEB Fixing Cleaning Web counter Lv.1 Use case When checking the total jam counter of the host machine Lv.1 Details The number of Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid (SL9) operations executed after the Fixing Cleaning Web Level Sensor (PS45) is ON.

  • Page 972: Job

    Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > JOB 8-190 ■ JOB COPIER > COUNTER > MISC ESC-PTH Escape paper path counter: Fin-D1/E1 COPIER > COUNTER > JOB Lv.1 Details Escape paper path counter DVPAPLEN Average paper length of job Unit Number of sheets Lv.1 Details Average paper length in the period from when the printer engine...
  • Page 973 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1 8-191 ■ PRDC-1 COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1 PO-CLN Pre-trn Charge Wire Clean Pad prts cntr COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1 Lv.1 Details Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad 1, 2 PRM-WIRE Primary Charging Wire parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement...
  • Page 974 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 8-192 ■ DRBL-1 COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1 OZ-FIL1 Fixing Ozone Filter parts counter COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement PRM-UNIT Primary Charging Assembly parts counter 2nd line: Estimated life Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement...
  • Page 975 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 8-193 COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 TR-BLT Transfer Belt (ETB) parts counter SP-CLAW Drum Cleaner Separation Claw prts cntr Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life...
  • Page 976 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 8-194 COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 DVG-ROLL Not used C2-PU-RL Left Deck Pickup Roller parts counter Lv.1 Details Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life C1-PU-RL Right Deck Pickup Roller parts counter...
  • Page 977 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 8-195 COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 C3-SP-RL Cassette 3 Separation Roller parts cntr C4-FD-RL Cassette 4 Feed Roller parts counter Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life...
  • Page 978 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 8-196 COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 FX-LW-RL Pressure Roller parts counter DLV-UCLW Delivery Upper Separation Claw prts cntr Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life...
  • Page 979 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 8-197 ■ DRBL-2 COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 LNT-TAP1 Dust Removal Sheet 1 counter: DADF COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 Lv.1 Details Dust-colleting DF-PU-RL Pickup Roller parts counter: DADF 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life...
  • Page 980 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 8-198 COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 PD-PU-RL Pickup Roller parts counter: Deck FIN-STPR Stapler parts counter: Fin-D1/E1 Lv.1 Details Pickup Roller (Front/Rear) of Paper Deck/POD Deck Lite/Multi Deck Lv.1 Details Stapler Unit (Upper)
  • Page 981 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 8-199 COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 DL-STC-R Static Eliminator prts cntr: Fin-D1/E1 BACK-ROL Paper Return Roller parts counter:Fin-E1 Lv.1 Details Fin-D1: Feed Guide Assembly Static Eliminator Lv.1 Details Paper Return Roller (Front/Rear) Fin-E1: Delivery Static Eliminator (Right) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement...
  • Page 982 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 8-200 COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 IS-F-RL1 Feed Roller prts cntr: INS-K1/L1, PF/INS IS-COLL2 Fold Uni Ppr Fd Drv Rol prts cntr:PF/INS Lv.1 Details INS-H1: Upper Tray Feed Roller Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement INS-J1, PF/INS: Inserter Feed Roller...

  • Page 983: T-Cntr

    Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > LF 8-201 ■ T-CNTR ■ LF COPIER > COUNTER > T-CNTR COPIER > COUNTER > LF BLACK [Not used] K-DRM-LF Display of Drum Unit (Bk) life Lv.1 Details Lv.1 Details To display how much the Drum Unit (Bk) is close to the end of life in % (percentage).

  • Page 984: Feeder

    Service Mode > FEEDER > DISPLAY 8-202 FEEDER FEEDER > DISPLAY RDSN-RCV Display of Lead Sensor reception voltage Lv.1 Details To display the light-receiving voltage value for the Lead Sensor. DISPLAY Use case When jams frequently occur Adj/set/operate method Remove and insert the paper at the sensor position, and check the value at presence/absence of the paper.

  • Page 985: Adjust

    Service Mode > FEEDER > ADJUST 8-203 ADJUST FEEDER > ADJUST LA-SPD2 Fine adj of DADF image magnifictn: back Lv.1 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color FEEDER > ADJUST Image Reader Unit-C1 only. DOCST Adj of DADF img lead edge margin: front To adjust the image magnification in vertical scanning direction for...

  • Page 986: Function

    Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION 8-204 FUNCTION FEEDER > ADJUST ADJSSCN1 Zoom adj in 2-sided vert scan way: front Lv.1 Details To make a fine adjustment of the front side image magnification in FEEDER > FUNCTION vertical scanning direction at the time of DADF duplex scanning. SENS-INT Initialization of DADF Sensors As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.1% in...
  • Page 987 Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION 8-205 FEEDER > FUNCTION FEEDER > FUNCTION FEED-CHK Specifying DADF individual feed mode SL-ON Operation check of DADF Solenoid Lv.1 Details To specify the feed mode for DADF. Lv.1 Details To start operation check for the solenoid specified by SL-CHK. Feed operation is activated by FEED-ON.
  • Page 988 Service Mode > FEEDER > OPTION 8-206 OPTION FEEDER > OPTION SIZE-SW ON/OFF of mixed paper detection:AB, Inch Lv.1 Details To set ON/OFF of mixed paper detection: AB configuration and Inch configuration Use case When enabling to mix AB and Inch configuration sizes original Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.

  • Page 989: Sorter

    Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST 8-207 SORTER SORTER > ADJUST STP-R1 Rear 1-staple position (R size) Lv.1 Details To adjust the A4R/LGL/LTRR paper rear 1-staple position on ADJUST Finisher. As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves by 0.49 SORTER >...
  • Page 990 Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST 8-208 SORTER > ADJUST SORTER > ADJUST SDL-ALG Adj of Saddle Stitcher alignment width STP-F3 A4R front stpl pstn (<45 deg): Fin-E1 Lv.1 Details To adjust the alignment width of Saddle Stitcher. Lv.1 Details To adjust the one front staple position on the A4R size paper.
  • Page 991 Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST 8-209 SORTER > ADJUST SORTER > ADJUST STP-R4 LTRR rear stpl pstn (<45 deg): Fin-E1 PRCS-RET Adj Process Tray return amount:Fin-E1 Lv.1 Details To adjust the one rear staple position on the LTRR size paper. Lv.1 Details To adjust the pull-back amount of the paper on the Processing Tray.
  • Page 992 Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST 8-210 SORTER > ADJUST SORTER > ADJUST THC-CL Heavy ppr curl prevention mode:Fin-E1 THN-STC Poor thin ppr stack prev mode:Fin-E1 Lv.1 Details Set 1 when upward curl occurs on the heavy paper delivered. Lv.1 Details Set 1 when thin paper is not appropriately stacked.
  • Page 993 Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST 8-211 SORTER > ADJUST SORTER > ADJUST FIN-NIS Tray drive noise reduct mode: Fin-E1 Z-FL-CH Set Z-fold stapleable quantity:Fin-E1 Lv.1 Details Set 1 when the Finisher operation noise is loud. Lv.1 Details To set the maximum number of stitch pages in Z-fold stapling. When 1 is set, the initial Finisher operation is minimized.

  • Page 994: Function

    Service Mode > SORTER > FUNCTION 8-212 FUNCTION SORTER > FUNCTION PF-SENS2 Adj Release Timing Sensor output: PFU Lv.1 Details To adjust the output of Release Timing Sensor on Paper Folding Unit SORTER > FUNCTION automatically. FIN-BK-R Controller PCB backup data read Use case - When replacing the Release Timing Sensor Lv.1 Details...
  • Page 995 Service Mode > SORTER > OPTION 8-213 OPTION SORTER > OPTION TRY-OVER Set of fold ppr stack limit: Fin-E1 Lv.1 Details To set the limit of stack capacity for small size Z-fold paper. SORTER > OPTION When clearing the limit of stack capacity, paper can be stacked BLNK-SW Set Saddle Finisher fold position margin beyond the maximum stack capacity.
  • Page 996 Service Mode > SORTER > OPTION 8-214 SORTER > OPTION SORTER > OPTION FDPL-SL Set soil prev for back of Saddle:Fin-E1 BUFF-INT Ppr intvl after buffer ppr ejctn: Fin-E1 Lv.1 Details To set ON/OFF of the Feed Plate Engagement Solenoid at the time Lv.1 Details In case of paper with excessive upward curl, paper right after the of Saddle stacking operation.

  • Page 997: Board

    Service Mode > BOARD > OPTION 8-215 BOARD OPTION BOARD > OPTION MENU-1 Hide/dis of printer setting menu level 1 Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide the level 1 of printer setting menu. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.

  • Page 998: Installation

    Installation ■ Checking before ■ Paper Deck Heater Installation Unit-A1 ■ Table of Options ■ Utility Tray-A1/A2 Combination ■ Card Reader-C1/Copy ■ Checking the Contents Card Reader-F1 ■ Unpacking ■ Voice Guidance Kit-F1/F2 ■ Installation ■ Installation Procedure ■ When Relocating the for Expansion Bus-F1/ Machine F2, IPSec Board-B2 and...

  • Page 999: Checking Before Installation

    Installation > Checking before Installation > Checking Installation Space Checking before Installation Checking Installation Space 1) The foot of this equipment should be in contact with the floor. This equipment should be Following shows requirements for the installation site. kept on the level. Therefore, it is desirable to see the installation site in advance before bringing in the machine to the user's site.

  • Page 1000: Points To Note At Installation Work

    Installation > Checking before Installation > Points to Note at Installation Work Points to Note at Installation Work • The optional Copy Tray, Duplex Color Image Reader Unit are attached. 100 mm or more Take note of the following points when installing the host machine. 1) Moving the host machine from a cool place to a warm place can generate condensation, causing moisture beads on the metal surface.

This manual is also suitable for:

Imagerunner advance 6065 seriesImagerunner advance 6055 series

Table of Contents

Save PDF